JP2019092828A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve taste of a game.SOLUTION: In a case where a setup value is "1" to "3", and when "jackpot 2 symbols" are selected, a pachinko machine 1 stationarily displays stop symbols relating to "segment data A50" to "segment data A69", and in a case where a setup value is "4" to "6", stationarily displays them, when "jackpot 1 symbols" are selected. Therefore, when performance symbols corresponding to "normal symbols" are stationarily displayed and special symbols relating to "the segment data A50" to "the segment data A69" are stationarily displayed, it is suggested that the setup value is "1" to "3". However, when performance symbols corresponding to "probability variable symbols" are stationarily displayed and special symbols corresponding to "the segment data A50" to "the segment data A69" are stationarily displayed, it is suggested that the setup value is "4" to "6"SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 44

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a win determination according to a selected setting value is performed.

BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a win determination according to a selected setting value is performed (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, in accordance with the selected setting value, a pass / fail determination is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit game. In addition, when the success or failure judgment is executed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is selected, and the fluctuation effect corresponding to the selected fluctuation time is executed. In particular, the selection probability of a specific fluctuation time is made different for each of the selected setting values.

JP 2017-99453 A

However, in the conventional game machine, the interest of the game may be reduced.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the selected setting value is suggested by the selection probability of the effect corresponding to the specific fluctuation time. Therefore, while the player's attention to the effect executed during the fluctuation time is improved, the attention of the player to the stop symbol is lowered, and the interest of the game may be lowered.
An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention is a setting value selecting means for selecting any one of a plurality of setting values according to the operation of the operating means, and the setting value According to the setting value selected by the selection means, any of the plurality of stop symbols depending on the result of the win determination means performing the win determination to determine whether to cause the specific gaming state or not, and the win determination Display control means for executing display of any stop symbol, and the appearance rate of at least one of the plurality of stop symbols changes in accordance with the setting value selected by the setting value selection means It is characterized by

In the gaming machine according to the first invention, the appearance rate of at least one of the plurality of stop symbols changes in accordance with the setting value selected by the setting value selection means.
By this, it becomes possible to suggest the setting value selected by the setting value selection means by the appearance rate of the stop symbol.
Therefore, the player's attention to the stop symbol can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Here, a setting value operation unit described later corresponds to the operation means. A main control circuit 200 (step S4-3) described later corresponds to the setting value selection means. As the specific gaming state, a jackpot gaming state described later corresponds. As the final determination, a special figure falling determination described later corresponds. The main control circuit 200 (step S11-4) described later corresponds to the actual drop determination means. As the plurality of stop symbols, "normal symbols" and "probable symbols" described later correspond. An effect control circuit 300 described later corresponds to the display control means.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board, in which a portion particularly necessary for explanation is schematically shown. It is a block diagram showing composition of a control system of a pachinko machine. It is an address map of the memory area which CPU210 uses. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main display and a performance display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows main loop processing. It is a flow chart which shows evacuation processing at the time of power supply interception. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows setting value management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a dynamic port output process. It is a flowchart which shows a performance display apparatus output process. It is a flowchart which shows switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing starting ball | bowl detection process. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 starting ball detection processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 starting ball detection processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol random number acquisition processing. 51 is a flowchart showing special game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process in special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the special figure stop. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening opening processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric symbol switching process. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening control processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth closing effective processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening end weight processing. 51 is a flowchart showing ordinary game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the midst of drawing. It is a flowchart which shows a process of opening normally electric combination. It is a flowchart which shows a regular electronic switch opening / closing switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric combination product opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal motor-operated part closing effective process. It is a flow chart which shows processing unit opening end weight processing normally. It is a flowchart which shows performance display device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows base ratio calculation processing. It is a flowchart which shows sub timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows pending command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch command reception processing. It is a flow chart which shows change command reception processing. It is a flow chart which shows stop command reception processing. It is a figure showing a big hit symbol lottery table and a segment data table corresponding to the 1st special symbol lottery. It is a figure showing a big hit symbol lottery table and a segment data table corresponding to the 2nd special symbol lottery. It is a figure showing a big hit symbol lottery table and a stop effect data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. It is a figure showing a big hit symbol lottery table and a stop effect data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the present embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Whole configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an entire configuration of a pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 is configured to include an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integral door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3 and the integral door unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. Thus, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Further, the integral door unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.
The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame (outer frame). Then, the outer frame provided in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island facility of the game arcade.
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is disposed inside the outer frame unit 2.

The integral door unit 4 is formed in the shape of a rectangular door. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a disposed substantially at the center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a saucer unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a saucer And a firing handle 6 disposed on the side of the unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin, glass or the like. The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material, and has a shape that bulges forward. At each corner on the upper side of the decorative part 4b, a sound extraction part 4c in which a sound generator (speaker) 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed is provided. Each sound extraction part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output from the sound generation device 22 passes. Further, a plurality of frame lamps 20 (see FIG. 3) are disposed in the decorative portion 4b. Each frame lamp 20 is configured to include a light emitting element (LED) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The tray unit 5 has a tray 5a for receiving gaming balls (rented balls and winning balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c disposed on the front side of the tray 5a.
The effect button 5 b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and is disposed so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (operation to be pushed downward). Inside the tray unit 5, a first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 5b is disposed. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and is disposed so as to surround the effect button 5b. The rotation type selector 5c is capable of a rotation operation (operation of rotating around a cylindrical shaft) by the player. Inside the saucer unit 5, a second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is disposed. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 each time the rotary selector 5 c is operated to rotate by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 °).

Further, a lending operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 has a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 500 (see FIG. 3) capable of reading out and updating information recorded on a prepaid card. Then, when a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 500, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 500 is displayed on the frequency display 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated in a state where the prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit 500, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of the game balls paid out, and the remaining frequency of the updated valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated with the prepaid card in which the remaining frequency of the valuable medium remains is inserted in the CR unit 500, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 500.
Here, as the prepaid cart, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, or the like corresponds.
The launch handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the launch handle 6, a launch volume (not shown) for detecting the angle at which the launch handle 6 is turned. The emission volume outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control circuit 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of the game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a view showing the front of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3. Thus, the game board unit 10 is disposed on the back side of the integrated door unit 4. Then, the player can visually recognize the game board 11 (the game area 30) described later through the transparent plate 4a. In the present embodiment, a game area 30, which will be described later, is formed between the back of the transparent plate 4a and the front of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices attached to the set board (main image display apparatus 31, sub Image display device 32 etc.).
The set plate is formed in a box shape whose front side is open. The opening part which consists of a through-hole is provided in the approximate-central part in the backplate of a set board.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is formed in a flat plate shape by resin. In the approximate center of the game board 11, an opening (not shown) made of a through hole is provided. The player can visually recognize the display screen 31 a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the setting board.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which game balls launched in response to the rotation operation of the firing handle 6 flow down. In the game area 30, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured as paths through which the game balls flow down. There is.
Further, in the game area 30 of the game board 11, a plurality of board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) are disposed. Each panel lamp 21 is configured to include a light emitting element (LED) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is configured of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31 a capable of displaying an effect image.
On the display screen 31a, three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which a first effect pattern z1 (not shown) is displayed and a second effect pattern z2 (not shown) are displayed It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The first effect pattern z1 is configured to include identification information (patterns) such as numbers, characters, symbols and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the first effect pattern z1. The second effect pattern z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect pattern z2.
The variation display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol display area a4 is displayed. [2] Display that the type of effect pattern z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
With the stop display of effect symbols z1 and z2, the first effect symbol z1 of one type is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol display area a4 In the above, one kind of second effect pattern z2 is displayed (the color bar represents a predetermined color).
The special symbol is a combination of the first effect pattern z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) in which a reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
In the reserved symbol display area b1, a reserved symbol h corresponding to the start information in the notification display (the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol) is displayed. In the held symbol display area b2, a held symbol h corresponding to the start information for which the notification display is held is displayed.

The sub image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub image display device 32 is configured of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including the origin position (see FIG. 2) and the effect position (not shown) below the origin position. There is.
The sub image display 32 disposed (displaced) at the origin position is disposed above the display screen 31 a of the main image display 31 and does not cover the display screen 31 a. On the other hand, the sub image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the effect position is disposed on the front side of the display screen 31 a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31 a.

Below the display screen 31 a in the gaming area 30, a first starting opening 51 is provided. The first starting opening 51 is a ball entry opening (so-called "hose") that opens upward, and it is always possible to enter a game ball. The first starting opening 51 is capable of entering the gaming ball flowing down the left path (impossible of entering the gaming ball flowing down the right path).
In the first start port 51, a special view 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The special figure 1 start opening switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball entering the first start opening 51) entering the first start opening 51. Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special view 1 start port switch 101.
An upper left other winning opening 55, a left middle other winning opening 56, and a lower left other winning opening 57 are provided to the left of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is a ball opening which opens upward, and it is always possible to enter a game ball. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is capable of entering game balls flowing down the left side path (impossible to enter game balls flowing down the right side path).
On the game board 11, a left winning hole switch 106 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The left winning opening switch 106 is the game ball entering the upper left other winning opening 55 (entering the gaming ball to the upper left other winning opening 55), the gaming ball entering the left middle other winning opening 56 (the left middle other winning In response to the detection of the game ball entering the mouth 56) and the game ball entering the lower left other winning opening 57 (the ball entering the lower left other winning opening 57), the main control circuit detects the detection signal Output to 200. The main control circuit 200 causes the gaming ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the winning balls in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right of the display screen 31 a in the game area 30. The start gate 41 is always formed to allow passage by the game ball. The start gate 41 is capable of passing game balls flowing down the right path (it is impossible to pass game balls flowing down the left path).
The start gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3). The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing the start gate 41 (the passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 executes the normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.
Below the start gate 41 in the game area 30, a big winning opening 53 is provided. In the big winning opening 53, the closed state which makes it impossible to enter the game ball to the big winning opening 53, and the opening state which allows the game ball to enter the big winning opening 53 to be open. A special electric combination (special electric combination) 53a (a so-called "attacker") is provided.
The special electric symbol 53 a is opened and closed by the special winning opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). In the special winning opening 53, the special electric character 53a is normally closed and entry of the game ball is not possible, but the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won. When the jackpot gaming state is activated, the special electric symbol 53a is opened to allow the game ball to enter. The big winning opening 53 is capable of entering game balls flowing down the right path (impossible of entering game balls flowing down the left path).
In the special winning opening 53, a count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball entering the big winning opening 53) entering the big winning opening 53. In response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103, the main control circuit 200 causes the gaming ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the winning balls.

Below the big winning opening 53 in the game area 30, a second starting opening 52 is provided. The second start opening 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the second start opening 52, and an open state that makes it possible to enter the game ball into the second start opening 52. An ordinary electric combination (a common electric combination) 52a (so-called "electric tulip") which can be displaced is provided.
The ordinary electric jack 52a is opened and closed by an ordinary electric jack solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). In the second start-up opening 52, normally, the normal electric combination 52a is put in a closed state, and entry of the game ball is not possible, however, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the common movement combination is 52a is opened, and the game ball can enter. The second starting opening 52 is capable of entering the gaming ball flowing down the right path (impossible of entering the gaming ball flowing down the left path).
In the second start port 52, a special view 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Special figure 2 starting mouth switch 102, the detection signal vis-a-vis the main control circuit 200 according to the detection of the game ball which entered the 2nd starting mouth 52 (entering the game ball to the 2nd starting mouth 52) Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special view 2 start port switch 102.
Below the second starting opening 52 in the game area 30, a right other winning opening 54 is provided. The right and other winning combination opening 54 is a ball entry opening that opens upward, and it is always possible to enter a game ball. The right other winning opening 54 is capable of entering game balls flowing down the right path (impossible of entering game balls flowing down the left path).
In the other right winning opening 54, a right winning opening switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball entering the right other winning opening 54) entering the right other winning opening 54. . The main control circuit 200 causes the gaming ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the winning balls in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning hole switch 105.

At the lowermost position in the game area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that did not enter (win) in any of the winning ports 51-57.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3. And, in the pachinko machine 1, all the game balls (all the game balls discharged from the game area 30) hit in the game area 30 are configured to pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball hit in the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 by entering the winning opening 51 to 57 or passing through the out port 58 and flows into the discharge path. Do.
Specifically, the gaming balls having entered each of the winning openings 51 to 57 are guided by the discharge path after being detected by the switches 101 to 103, 105, 106 disposed in the winning openings. Also, the gaming balls discharged from the out port 58 are guided to the discharge path.
In the inner frame unit 3, an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball discharged from the game area 30) passing through the discharge path. By this, all the game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the respective winning openings 51 to 57 and the start gate 41.

A main display 60 is disposed on the game board 11. The main display 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured by a light emitting element (in the present embodiment, an LED).
Information on the game is displayed on the main display 60. That is, the main display 60 is configured to include a special view 1 display device, a special view 2 display device, a common view display device, and a state display device.
Specifically, the main display 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED 1 to LED 32). And in the main display 60, the LEDs 1 to 8 become the special view 1 display device, the LEDs 7 to the LED 16 become the special view 2 display device, the LEDs 17 to 24 become the common view display device, and the LEDs 25 to 32 show the state display It is a device.
The special view 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of a first special symbol including numbers, symbols, and the like. And in the special figure 1 display, the result of the 1st special symbol lottery is displayed by the 1st special symbol by which the stop display was carried out.
The special view 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of a second special symbol including numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special view 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the second special symbol stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the special view display device and the display of the effect symbols z1, z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are time when the variable display is started The stop display start time is associated with each of the lottery results indicated by the stopped display symbols.
And, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), or the second special symbol (stop symbol displayed on the special figure 2 display device When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), a big hit gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is generated.
The common drawing display device can perform variable display and stop display of a normal symbol including numbers, symbols and the like. Then, in the common-diagram display device, the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed by the normal symbols stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the common-diagram display device becomes a specific symbol (generally-per-diagram symbol), the common-mode gaming condition is generated, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player.
In the status display device, the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 1 pending number), the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 2 Number of reservations), the number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is held (general drawing reserve number), type of big hit gaming state (number of round game executions), instruction of launch of gaming ball to right path, etc. Is displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors that detect various abnormal states.
In the present embodiment, a glass frame open sensor 107, an inner frame open sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are disposed as detection sensors.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integral door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame open sensor 107 transmits a detection signal (glass frame open signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the opening of the integral door unit 4 to the inner frame unit 3. Do.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal (inner frame opening signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Do.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects the vibration of the game board 11. In the present embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal (panel vibration detection sensor signal) to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the vibration of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are provided in the game board 11. Then, each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal (panel radio wave detection sensor signal 1, panel radio wave detection sensor signal 2) to the main control circuit 200 according to the detection of radio waves.
The magnetism detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is disposed in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Further, in the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 disposed in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal (out-door magnetic detection sensor signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the detection of magnetism. Send to. In addition, each of the magnetic detection sensors 115 disposed on the game board 11 detects a detection signal (panel magnetic detection sensor signal 1, panel magnetic detection sensor signal 2) to the main control circuit 200 according to the detection of magnetism. To send.

(Configuration of control system)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an address map of a memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 is configured to include, as a circuit board, a main control board e1, a sub control board e2, a payout control board e3, an inner frame board e4, an external terminal board e5, a connection board e6, a panel board e7 and the like.
The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, the connection board e6 and the panel board e7 are circuit boards which are independent (separate). The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, the connection board e6 and the panel board e7 are respectively accommodated in individual board cases (not shown) ing.
The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, and the panel board e7 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board e1, the sub control board e2, and the panel board e7 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, and the connection board e6 are included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, and the connection board e6 are attached to the back side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes various control circuits.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300, the payout control circuit 400, and the control circuits 200, 300, 400, etc. And a power supply circuit 600.
In each control circuit 200, 300, 400, a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a program related to the progress of a game and a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing data necessary for the progress of the game, and the CPU are stored in the ROM. And a RAM (Random Access Memory) which is a temporary storage area used to proceed with processing based on a certain program.

The main control circuit 200 is mounted on the main control board e1. The main control circuit 200 includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, an input port 240, an output port 250, a frequency generation circuit 260, and a hard random number generation circuit 270.
The input port 240 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in the present embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).

A detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107 (glass frame opening signal), a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 (inner frame opening signal), and a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113 (panel vibration detection) Sensor signal), detection signal from one radio wave detection sensor 114 (board radio wave detection sensor signal 2), detection signal from three magnetic detection sensors 115 (outside magnetic detection sensor signal, board magnetic detection sensor signal 1, board magnetic) A detection sensor signal 2) or the like is input.
A detection signal from the glass frame open sensor 107 (glass frame open signal), a detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 (inner frame open signal), and from the magnetic detection sensor 115 disposed in the inner frame unit 3 The detection signal (outout magnetic detection sensor signal) is input to the input port 0 via the payout control board e3 and the inner frame board e4.
Detection signals from the vibration detection sensor 113 (panel vibration detection sensor signal), detection signals from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114 (panel radio wave detection sensor signal 2), and each magnetic detection sensor disposed on the game board 11 A detection signal (surface magnetic detection sensor signal 1 and surface magnetic detection sensor signal 2) from 115 is input to the input port 0 via the panel substrate e7.

A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch, a detection signal (not shown) from the key rotation detection switch 111, a detection signal (not shown) from the setting value selection switch, etc. are input to the input port 1.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right winning opening switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and the other radio wave detection sensor 114. A detection signal (board radio wave detection sensor signal 1) or the like is input.
A detection signal from the special view 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special view 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, etc. are input to the input port 3.
In each input port (input port 0 to input port 3), a reception storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) is provided. In each reception storage area, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is set.
Specifically, "1" is set in each reception storage area when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is input, and "1" is not input when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is not input. 0 is set.

The output port 250 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (output port 0 to output port 4 in the present embodiment).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA 0” to “SEGDATA 7”) for controlling lighting of the main display 60. Then, the data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 510 described later.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. The common signal output from the output port 1 is input to a sink driver 530 described later.
The output port 2 outputs external signals (OUT1 to OUT6, OUT8). The external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer 450 via the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4 and the external terminal board e5.
The external signals (OUT1 to OUT6, OUT8) output from the output port 2 are input to the hole computer 450 through the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4 and the external terminal board e5.

The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the normal motorized product solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the big winning opening solenoid 65, and the like. The control signals output from the output port 3 are input to the solenoids 64 and 65 via the panel substrate e7.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 61. Then, the data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 520 described later.

The main control circuit 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (sub-command transmission signal) to the effect control circuit 300 from the command output port 1, and a control command (disbursement command transmission from the command output port 2 to the payout control circuit 400. Signal).
The command output port 1 and the command output port 2 respectively include a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown). have.
The transmission data register outputs, to the FIFO buffer, a control command input based on a subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers and can store a plurality of control commands. Then, the FIFO buffer stores the control command input from the transmission data register, and outputs the stored control command to the transmission shift register in the order of input.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control circuit 300 or the payout control circuit 400 as serial data.

Furthermore, a test signal output circuit 900 is mounted on the main control board e1.
The CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit gaming state, execution state of time saving control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) in test signal management processing (step S4-18) described later. Then, the generated test signal is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port.
Then, a test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface substrate of a test computer (not shown) via the test signal output circuit 900.
In addition, the detection signal from the special view 1 start opening switch 101, the detection signal from the special view 2 start opening switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, the detection from the right winning opening switch 105 A signal, a detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and the like are input to the input port 240, and are also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit 900. Ru.
Furthermore, a control signal for controlling the drive of each solenoid (normal motor combination solenoid 64, large winning opening solenoid 65, etc.) output from output port 3 is input to each solenoid 64, 65 and also a test signal. The data is input to the interface board of the test computer via the output circuit 900.

The main control circuit 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG. 4, the memory area used by the CPU 210 is configured to include a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. .
Here, in FIG. 4, the address for specifying the memory area is shown in hexadecimal ("H" indicates that it is hexadecimal).

In the ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220), a use area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an out-of-use area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH) are provided.
The use area m1 stores (stores) a program and data for controlling the progress of the game.
In the non-use area m2, a program and data for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules, a program and data for controlling the display of the performance display device 61 (a program for calculating a base ratio described later And (including data) are stored (stored).
In the use area m1, a program area (0000H to 0A89H), an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH), and a data area (1000H to 1A7AH) are provided. The program area stores a program for controlling the progress of the game. On the other hand, data for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the data area. The used area m1 may be configured without including the unused area.
The non-use area m2 is provided with program areas (2000H to 27FFH) and data areas (2800H to 2BFFH). The program area stores a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules, and a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. On the other hand, in the data area, data for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules and data for controlling display of the performance display device 61 are stored.
In addition to the use area m1 and the non-use area m2, the ROM 220 is provided with unused areas (1A7BH to 1DFFH), ROM comment areas (1E00H to 1EFFH), program management areas (2FC0H to 2FFFH), etc. There is.
The ROM comment area stores arbitrary data such as a program title and a version. On the other hand, information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs is stored in the program management area.
In the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 4 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the non-use area m2. Thus, the boundary between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2 is clarified.

In the RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230), a use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an out-of-use area M2 (F210H to F228H) are provided.
The use area M1 is used when executing processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progression of a game) stored in the use area m1. That is, various data are temporarily stored in the use area M1 upon execution of processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.
The non-use area M2 is a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling the display of the performance display 61). Used when performing That is, a program stored in the non-use area m2 in the non-use area M2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display 61) Various types of data are temporarily stored upon execution of processing based on.
Specifically, in the use area M1, input / output data in the main control circuit 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results and gaming states, etc. are temporarily used. Are stored. In particular, an area for storing start information acquired in response to input of detection signals from each of the special view 1 start port switch 101, the special view 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104 in the use area M1 A start information storage area (to be described later) is provided.
In the use area M1, a work area (F000H to F12AH), an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), and a stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH) are provided. The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data while the program stored in the use area m1 (a program for controlling the progress of the game) is being executed. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data while the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1 is being executed. The used area M1 may be configured without including the unused area.
In the non-use area M2, a work area (F210H to F21FH) and a stack area (F220H to F228H) are provided. The work area is under execution of a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61) Is used as an area for temporarily storing various data. On the other hand, the stack area is under execution of a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling the display of the performance display 61). Is used as an area to temporarily save various data.
In the RAM 230, an unused area M3 of a predetermined byte (4 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the non-used area M2. Thus, the boundary between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2 is clarified.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in processing based on a program (program for controlling the progression of a game) stored in the use area m1, reference to data stored in the non-use area M2 is permitted. There is.
On the other hand, it is prohibited that the data stored in the non-use area M2 is rewritten (changed) by processing based on the program (program for controlling the progression of the game) stored in the use area m1. There is.
In the process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the process related to the test defined by the game machine rules or the program for controlling the display of the performance display 61), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, the processing area based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the process related to the test defined by the gaming machine rules or the program for controlling the display of the performance display 61) It is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in M1.
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The frequency generation circuit 260 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in the present embodiment), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the hard random number generation circuit 270.
The hard random number generation circuit 270 generates a first loop counter that generates a random random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a big hit random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a large hit random number for the second special symbol lottery. A third loop counter and a fourth loop counter for generating reach group random numbers are included.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260. A random number is generated to hit a regular symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260. Generate a big hit random number of the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260. Generate a big hit random number of the second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter receives the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (0 to 1006 in this embodiment) every time 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (once by dividing the clock frequency by 32). The reach group random number is generated by updating one by one in the range. In the present embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

Further, the main control board e1 is provided with a setting value operation unit (not shown). The set value operation unit has a key rotation detection switch 111, a set value selection switch 112, and a set value display device 62.
The key rotation detection switch 111 has an operation unit that can be switched between the setting permission state and the setting prohibition state. The key rotation detection switch 111 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting permission state. On the other hand, the key rotation detection switch 111 stops the output of the detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting prohibition state.
In the present embodiment, the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 is provided with a keyhole into which a dedicated key is inserted. Then, the key rotation detection switch 111 can switch the state (setting permitted state or setting prohibited state) of the operation unit by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole. That is, the key rotation detection switch 111 can not switch the state (setting permitted state or setting prohibited state) of the operation unit unless a dedicated key is inserted in the keyhole.
Also, with the key rotation detection switch 111, when the operation unit is in the setting prohibition state, it becomes possible to insert a dedicated key into the keyhole, and it becomes possible to extract the dedicated key from the keyhole. On the other hand, with the key rotation detection switch 111, when the operation unit is in the setting permission state, it is impossible to insert a dedicated key into the keyhole, and it is impossible to extract the dedicated key from the keyhole. Become.
The setting value selection switch 112 has an operation unit that can be pressed. The setting value selection switch 112 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 each time the operation unit is pressed.
The setting value display device 62 is configured of a 7-segment LED or the like. The set value display device 62 displays set values to be described later. In addition, since the setting value display device 62 is disposed on the back side of the game board 11, the player can not visually recognize.

Here, setting information (setting value) set by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The “setting information” is information for specifying the winning probability (probability of winning in the big hit gaming state) of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery).
A setting information storage area is provided in the RAM of the main control circuit 200. In the setting information storage area, any one value of “1” to “6” is set (stored) as setting information. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is made the probability according to the value set in the setting information storage area.
In the following description, the value stored in the setting information storage area is referred to as a “setting value”.
In this embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each setting value is, in the order of highest winning probability, the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = “6”, the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = “5” The winning probability corresponding to setting value = “4”, the winning probability corresponding to setting value = “3”, the winning probability corresponding to setting value = “2”, the winning probability corresponding to setting value = “1” The probability is “high” → the winning probability is “low”).

In the pachinko machine 1 in particular, it is possible to change (select) the set value when the power is turned on. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the manager of the pachinko machine 1 (an employee of the game arcade where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc.).
In the pachinko machine 1, the setting value change permission state is started in response to the power being turned on in a state where the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 is displaced to the setting permission state.
During the setting value change permitting state, the setting value display device 62 displays a value indicating a value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area.
In addition, in the setting value change permitting state, each time the setting value selection switch 112 is pressed, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed. At this time, when the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed, the value (setting value indicating value) displayed on the setting value display device 62 is also correspondingly. Be changed.
As a result, the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 sets a desired value among "1" to "6" as the setting value by pressing the setting value selection switch 112 while the setting value change permission state is enabled. It can be (selected).
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, in response to the switching of the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 from the setting permission state to the setting prohibition state, the setting value change permission state is ended. This makes it impossible to change the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area. Further, in accordance with the end of the setting value change permission state, the display of the value indicating the setting value in the setting value display device 62 is ended.

Further, a performance display device 61 is provided on the main control board e1. The performance display device 61 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 so that the player can not visually recognize.
The performance display device 61 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured by a light emitting element (in the present embodiment, an LED).
In the performance display device 61, the number of game balls fired in the game area 30, and a predetermined ball entry opening (in the present embodiment, the first start opening 51, the second start opening 52, and other winning openings 54 to 57) Information (a base ratio to be described later) calculated based on the number of award balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the display is displayed.
The performance display device 61 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display part is comprised from 7 segment LED which can display a number, a symbol, etc., and dot segment LED which can display dots, such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 61 includes 32 lighting elements (LEDs 33 to 64). And in the performance display device 61, the LED 33 to the LED 40 become the display part of the first digit, the LED 41 to the LED 48 become the display part of the second digit, the LED 49 to the LED 56 become the display part of the third digit, LED57 to LED 64 Is the fourth digit display section.
The main control circuit 200 calculates a base ratio, which will be described later, during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state (in the present embodiment, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and the stop of the time saving control). Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 61.
The “base ratio” is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the out-of-ball count. The main control circuit 200 calculates a base ratio in the section for each predetermined section (period).
In the present embodiment, a section in which a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, 60000 [sphere]) of out-sphere numbers are detected (discharged) is defined as the predetermined section. That is, each section is started in response to the end of the previous section, and is ended in response to the number of out spheres detected in the present section reaching a predetermined number (60000 [sphere]). Then, the main control circuit 200 calculates the base ratio as needed (in real time) during each section.
Here, a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the main control circuit 200 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Out sphere" refers to the number of out spheres. The “out ball” refers to a game ball discharged from the game area 30. In the present embodiment, the out ball refers to the gaming ball (the gaming ball detected by the out switch 109) that has passed through the discharge path.
Here, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as the out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the gaming ball discharged from the out port 58, and the gaming ball detected by the out switch 109 may be used as the out ball.
The “number of payouts” refers to the total of the winning balls paid out in response to the entry of the gaming balls to the first starting opening 51, the second starting opening 52, and the other winning openings 54-57.
In the performance display device 61, the first base ratio and the second base ratio are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals (5.0 [s] in the present embodiment).
The “first base ratio” is a base ratio of the current section (a base ratio calculated for a period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 61, information for identifying the type of the base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) by the upper two-digit display unit of the four-digit display unit. Is displayed. Further, in the performance display device 61, the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two-digit display unit among the four-digit display units.

The effect control circuit 300 is mounted on the sub control board e2.
The effect control circuit 300 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
Based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300 displays the effect image on each of the image display devices 31 and 32, turns on each of the lamps 20 and 21, outputs the sound by the sound generation device 22, It controls the drive of a motor (not shown) that drives the movable body.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a program related to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The control command received from the main control circuit 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like are temporarily stored in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200. Then, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data and the like are generated according to the effect program (effect control table) corresponding to the contents of the determined effect. Then, control signals based on the generated control data are output to the image display devices 31, 32, the sound generation device 22, the lamps 20, 21, the motors, and the like.

The payout control circuit 400 is mounted on the payout control board e3.
The payout control circuit 400 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
The payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball launch operation of the game ball launch device 430 based on the detection signal input from the launch volume.
Specifically, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball launch operation by the game ball launch device 430 so that the game ball is launched to the game area 30 with the strength according to the detection signal input from the launch volume. Do.
Further, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on each of the control command received from the main control circuit 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 500.
Specifically, the ball lending button 7a transmits a ball lending operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board e6 in response to the pressing operation. Then, upon receiving the ball lending operation signal, the CR unit 500 subtracts the frequency necessary for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls from the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the inserted prepaid card, Along with updating the recording of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card, a ball lending instruction signal instructing the payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 via the connection board e6. Furthermore, when the payout control circuit 400 receives the ball lending instruction signal, it controls the payout operation of the gaming balls by the gaming ball payout device 440 so as to pay out a predetermined number of gaming balls.
The CR unit 500 transmits a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium through the connection board e6 when the prepaid cart is inserted and when the recording of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated. It transmits to display 7c. Then, when receiving the frequency signal, the frequency display device 7c displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium indicated by the frequency signal.
The return button 7b transmits a return operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board e6 in response to the pressing operation. Then, when the CR unit 500 receives the return operation signal, the CR unit 500 returns (discharges) the prepaid card in which the remaining frequency of the valuable medium remains.

Next, specific configurations of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main display and the performance display device.
As shown in FIG. 5, the main display 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32). Further, the performance display device 61 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LEDs 33 to 64).
And CPU210 drives the lighting element (LED1-LED32) contained in the main indicator 60, and the lighting element (LED33-LED64) contained in the performance display apparatus 61 by dynamic lighting control.
Specifically, a source driver (segment driver) 510, a source driver (segment driver) 520, and a sink driver (common driver) 530 are mounted on the main control substrate e1.

The source driver 510 controls the lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display 60.
The source driver 510 includes eight transistors TR1 to TR8. Each of the transistors TR1 to TR8 is an NPN transistor.
The power supply voltage Vcc is applied from the power supply circuit 600 to the collector electrodes of the transistors TR1 to TR8. Further, data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) are input from the CPU 210 (output port 0) to the base electrodes of the transistors TR1 to TR8.

The data signal line DL1 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR1 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED1, the LED9, the LED17, and the LED 25 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL1.
Thus, when the data signal (“SEGDATA0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR1 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL1. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA0”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR1 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL1.
The data signal line DL2 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR2 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 2, the LED 10, the LED 18, and the LED 26 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL 2.
Thus, when a data signal (“SEGDATA1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR2 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL2. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA1”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR2 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL2.
The data signal line DL3 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR3 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 3, the LED 11, the LED 19, and the LED 27 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL3.
Thus, when the data signal (“SEGDATA2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR3 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL3. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA2”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR3 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL3.
The data signal line DL4 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR4 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 4, the LED 12, the LED 20, and the LED 28 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL4.
Thus, when a data signal ("SEGDATA3") is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR4 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL4. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA3”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR4 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL4.

A data signal line DL5 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR5 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 5, the LED 13, the LED 21, and the LED 29 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL 5.
Thus, when a data signal ("SEGDATA4") is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR5 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL5. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA 4”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR 5 (when the data signal is low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL 5.
The data signal line DL6 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR6 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 6, the LED 14, the LED 22, and the LED 30 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL 6.
Thus, when a data signal ("SEGDATA5") is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR6 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL6. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA5”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR6 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL6.
A data signal line DL7 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR7 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 7, the LED 15, the LED 23, and the LED 31 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL 7.
Thus, when the data signal (“SEGDATA 6”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR 7 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL 7. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA 6”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR 7 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL 7.
The data signal line DL8 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR8 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 8, the LED 16, the LED 24, and the LED 32 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL8.
As a result, when a data signal (“SEGDATA 7”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR8 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL8. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA 7”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR8 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL8.

The source driver 520 controls lighting of the lighting elements (LEDs 33 to 64) included in the performance display device 61.
The source driver 520 includes eight transistors TR9 to TR16. Each of the transistors TR9 to TR16 is an NPN type transistor.
The power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the collector electrodes of the transistors TR9 to TR16 from the power supply circuit 600. Also, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") are input from the CPU 210 (output port 4) to the base electrodes of the transistors TR9 to TR16.

A data signal line DL9 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR9 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 33, the LED 41, the LED 49, and the LED 57 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL9.
Thus, when the data signal ("7SEGDATA0") is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR9 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL9. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA0”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR9 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL9.
A data signal line DL10 is electrically connected to an emitter electrode of the transistor TR10 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 34, the LED 42, the LED 50, and the LED 58 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL10.
As a result, when a data signal ("7SEGDATA1") is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR10 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL10. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA1”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR10 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL10.
A data signal line DL11 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR11 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 35, the LED 43, the LED 51, and the LED 59 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL11.
Thus, when a data signal ("7SEGDATA2") is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR11 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL11. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA2”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR11 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL11.
A data signal line DL12 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR12 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 36, the LED 44, the LED 52, and the LED 60 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL12.
Thus, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR12 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL12. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA3”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR12 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL12.

A data signal line DL13 is electrically connected to an emitter electrode of the transistor TR13 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 37, the LED 45, the LED 53, and the LED 61 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL13.
Thus, when the data signal ("7SEGDATA4") is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR13 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL13. On the other hand, when the data signal ("7SEGDATA4") is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR13 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL13.
The data signal line DL14 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR14 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 38, the LED 46, the LED 54, and the LED 62 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL14.
Thus, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA5”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR14 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL14. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA5”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR14 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL14.
A data signal line DL15 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR15 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 39, the LED 47, the LED 55, and the LED 63 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL15.
As a result, when a data signal ("7SEGDATA6") is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR15 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL15. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA6”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR15 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL15.
The data signal line DL16 is electrically connected to the emitter (emitter) electrode of the transistor TR16 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 40, the LED 48, the LED 56, and the LED 64 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL16.
Thus, when a data signal ("7SEGDATA7") is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR16 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL16. On the other hand, when the data signal ("7SEGDATA7") is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR16 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL16.

The sink driver 530 controls lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display 60 and the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 61.
The sink driver 530 includes four transistors TR17 to TR20. Each of the transistors TR17 to TR20 is an NPN transistor.
The emitter (emitter) electrodes of the transistors TR17 to TR20 are electrically connected to the ground terminal of the power supply circuit 600. Also, common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) are input from the CPU 210 (output port 1) to the base electrodes of the transistors TR17 to TR20.

The common signal line CL1 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR17. Then, the common signal line CL1 is electrically connected to the LEDs 1 to 8 (lighting element group a) of the main display 60 and the cathode electrodes of the LEDs 33 to 40 (lighting element group A) of the performance display device 61. ing.
Accordingly, when the common signal (“COM0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR17 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL1 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, when the common signal (“COM0”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR17 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL1 is not grounded to the ground terminal.
The common signal line CL2 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR18. Then, the common signal line CL2 is electrically connected to the LEDs 9 to 16 (lighting element group b) of the main display 60 and the cathode electrodes of the LEDs 41 to 48 (lighting element group B) of the performance display device 61. ing.
Thus, when a common signal (“COM1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR18 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL2 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, when the common signal (“COM1”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR18 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL2 is not grounded to the ground terminal.
The common signal line CL3 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR19. Then, the common signal line CL3 is electrically connected to the LEDs 17 to 24 (lighting element group c) of the main display 60 and the cathode electrodes of the LEDs 49 to LED 56 (lighting element group C) of the performance display device 61. ing.
Thus, when a common signal (“COM2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR19 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL3 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, when the common signal (“COM2”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR19 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL3 is not grounded to the ground terminal.
The common signal line CL4 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR20. The common signal line CL4 is electrically connected to the LEDs 25 to 32 (lighting element group d) of the main display 60 and the cathode electrodes of the LEDs 57 to LED 64 (lighting element group D) of the performance display device 61. ing.
Thus, when a common signal (“COM3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR20 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL4 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, when the common signal (“COM3”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR20 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL4 is not grounded to the ground terminal.

The sink driver 530 has a function of selecting a lighting element group (a group of lighting elements) which can be lit.
In the present embodiment, the first lighting element group corresponding to the transistor TR17 (common signal line CL1), the second lighting element group corresponding to the transistor TR18 (common signal line CL2), and the transistor TR19 (common signal line CL3) A corresponding third lighting element group and a fourth lighting element group corresponding to the transistor TR20 (common signal line CL4) are configured.
The first lighting element group includes the LEDs 1 to 8 (lighting element group a) of the main display 60, and the LEDs 33 to 40 (lighting element group A) of the performance display device 61.
The second lighting element group includes the LEDs 9 to 16 (lighting element group b) of the main display 60 and the LEDs 41 to 48 (lighting element group B) of the performance display device 61.
The third lighting element group includes the LEDs 17 to 24 (lighting element group c) of the main display 60, and the LEDs 49 to 56 (lighting element group C) of the performance display device 61.
The fourth lighting element group includes the LEDs 25 to 32 (lighting element group d) of the main display 60, and the LEDs 57 to LED 64 (lighting element group D) of the performance display device 61.
All the lighting elements included in each of the first to fourth lighting element groups are electrically connected to a common signal line corresponding to the lighting element group. That is, each lighting element (LED1 to LED8, LED33 to LED40) included in the first lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL1. Each lighting element (LED9-LED16, LED41-LED48) included in the second lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL2. Each lighting element (LED17-LED24, LED49-LED56) included in the third lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL3. Each lighting element (LED25-LED32, LED57-LED64) included in the fourth lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL4.
The CPU 210 outputs a common signal to any one of the transistors TR17 to TR20 (makes the common signal high). Then, the CPU 210 sequentially switches, among the transistors TR17 to TR20, the transistors that output the common signal (set the common signal to the high level) at a predetermined cycle.
Specifically, each time a dynamic port output process (step S4-4) to be described later is executed, a transistor that outputs a common signal (makes the common signal high) is selected from among the transistors TR17 to TR20. Can be switched in the order of
Thus, each time the dynamic port output processing (step S4-4) is performed, the common signal line connected to the ground terminal among the common signal line CL1 to the common signal line CL4 is switched in a predetermined order.
That is, the sink driver 530 grounds one common signal line out of the common signal line CL1 to the common signal line CL4 in response to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) input from the CPU 210, and grounds the same. The lighting element group corresponding to the common signal line can be lit.

On the other hand, each of the source drivers 510 and 520 selects a lighting element to be lighted out of the plurality of lighting elements included in the lighting element group (the first lighting element group to the fourth lighting element group) selected by the sink driver 530. It has a function.
As described above, each lighting element group (first to fourth lighting element groups) includes 16 lighting elements. The sixteen lighting elements included in each of the lighting element groups (first to fourth lighting element groups) are electrically connected to different data signal lines (transistors TR1 to TR16).
Then, during a period in which one of the common signal lines among the common signal lines CL1 to CL4 is grounded, the CPU 210 lights (drives) one of the lighting elements connected to the one common signal line. Data signal to the transistors TR1 to TR16 corresponding to the lighting elements to be output) (set the data signal to high level).
Specifically, a common signal is output to one of the transistors TR17 to TR20 by the dynamic port output process (step S4-4), and the common connected by the output of the common signal is output. Among the lighting elements connected to the signal line, the data signal is output to the transistors TR1 to TR16 corresponding to the lighting elements to be lighted.
As a result, the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line corresponding to the lighting element to be lit among the lighting elements connected to the common signal line grounded according to the output of the common signal, and as a result The current flows to the lighting element to be lighted, and the lighting element is lighted.
According to the above, it is possible to drive LEDs 1 to 64 by dynamic lighting control by a combination of common data for selecting a common signal line to be grounded and segment data for selecting a data signal line to which power supply voltage Vcc is applied. Become.
In the pachinko machine 1 in particular, a source driver 510 corresponding to the main display 60 and a source driver 520 corresponding to the performance display device 61 are provided. Then, source driver 510 controls the application of power supply voltage Vcc to data signal lines DL1 to DL8 included in main display 60. On the other hand, source driver 520 controls the application of power supply voltage Vcc to data signal lines DL9 to DL16 included in performance display device 61. As a result, the application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal line is individually controlled by the main display 60 and the performance display device 61.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a common sink driver 530 is provided for the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. In addition, the lighting elements (lighting elements) constituting the main display 60 in the lighting elements (first to fourth lighting elements) corresponding to the common signal lines CL1 to CL4 and the performance display device 61 And the lighting element (lighting element group) which comprises these. That is, the lighting elements (lighting element group) constituting the main display 60 and the lighting elements (lighting element group) constituting the performance display device 61 are electrically connected to the common signal lines CL1 to CL4. There is. Then, the sink driver 530 controls grounding of each of the common signal lines CL1 to CL4. As a result, grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display 60 and the performance display device 61.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, it is not necessary to provide the sink driver 530 corresponding to each of the main display 60 and the performance display 61, and as a result, the output port corresponding to each of the main display 60 and the performance display 61 It is not necessary to provide an output port for outputting a common signal.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts required to perform lighting control of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61.
Further, in the main control circuit 200 (CPU 210), it is not necessary to generate a common signal corresponding to each of the main display 60 and the performance display 61, and control for lighting control of the main display 60 and the performance display 61 is performed. It is possible to reduce the load.

(About various lottery)
Next, various lottery performed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed in response to the passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball. Then, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a game state is generated per common drawing. In the gaming state per common drawing, the normal electric character 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting opening 52.
In the present embodiment, one type of "per common drawing" is set as the type of gaming state per common drawing which is generated when a normal symbol lottery is won.

When "per game" is won (normal symbol lottery game is won), control is performed so that the regular symbol is stopped and displayed with "per game symbol" in the game controller.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is unsuccessfully selected, the ordinary symbol display device is controlled to stop and display the normal symbol with the "off symbol".
The pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing time saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time saving control, the time (hereinafter, referred to as “variation time”) in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed is shortened as compared with the stop of the time saving control. In this embodiment, during execution of the time reduction control, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for performing the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is shortened as compared with the stop of the time reduction control. Further, during execution of time saving control, the number of times of opening of the normal electric actor 52a is increased in the gaming state per common drawing as compared with the stop of the time shortening control, and the opening time of the normal electric actor 52a is Extended.
When the player wins “per press”, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric jack 52a is set to 1 [time] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric jack 52 a at each time is 0.5 It is set to [s] or 2.0 [s]. At this time, while the time saving control is being performed, the number of times of opening of the normal motor-operated part 52a is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the common motorized part 52a at each time is set to 2.0 [s]. It is set. On the other hand, while the time saving control is stopped, the number of times of opening of the normal motor-operated part 52a is set to 1 [time], and the opening time of the common motorized part 52a in each time is set to 0.5 [s] Be done.

In the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 51, and the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 52 triggers the second Special symbol lottery is executed. And, when winning in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, a big hit gaming state occurs. In the big hit game state, a round game in which the special electric symbol 53a is shifted from the closed state to the open state is executed, and it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 53.
In the present embodiment, “big hit 1” and “big hit 2” are set as the types of big hit gaming states to be generated when winning the first special symbol lottery, and are triggered when the second special symbol lottery is won As a type of big hit gaming state, “big hit 3” to “big hit 6” is set.

When the "big hit 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 1 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probable variation symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the “probable symbol” is, for example, the same as “7, 7, 7”, etc., for the first effect pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3. The second effect pattern z2 stop-displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 is a display mode indicating a predetermined color while being aligned with "numeric symbols" indicating odd numbers.
When the "big hit 2" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 2 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. In addition, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "normal symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the “normal symbol” is, for example, the same as the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, such as “2, 2, 2”, etc. The second effect pattern z2 stop-displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 is a display mode indicating a predetermined color while being aligned with the "number symbol" indicating an even number.
When the "big hit 3" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 3 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probable variation symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "big hit 4" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 4 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probable variation symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "big hit 5" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 5 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. In addition, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, a stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "hidden symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "understanding symbol" is, for example, the first effect pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, such as "1, 2, 3", etc. In addition to the combination having regularity, the second effect pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect pattern display area a4 is a display mode in which the predetermined color is indicated.
When the "big hit 6" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 6 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. In addition, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, a stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "hidden symbol" is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is defeated (in the case of "off"), the display symbols 61 and 62 stop and display the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "off symbol". Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "disappeared symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, for example, the first effect pattern z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is displayed in at least one of the first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3 such as "1,6,9". The number indicated by the “number symbol” is a combination different from the number indicated by the “number symbol” stopped and displayed in the other area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 Is a display mode in which a predetermined color is indicated.

When the "big hit 1" to the "big hit 6" are won, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the big hit gaming state.
In the present embodiment, the number of round games is set to 5 [times] when the player wins "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 5" or "big hit 6". On the other hand, when the "big hit 3" is won, the number of round games is set to 15 [times]. On the other hand, if the "big hit 4" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times].
In the case of winning "big hit 1" to "big hit 6", the longest opening time of the special electric actor 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in the present embodiment) Ru. In each round game, it is determined that the longest opening time set since the special electric character 53a was opened, and the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 53 in the round game is It is ended in response to the establishment of one of reaching the predetermined upper limit number (10 [sphere] in the present embodiment).

In addition, with pachinko machine 1, as a game state which relates to the winning probability of special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery and 2nd special symbol lottery), “special figure low probability state” and “special figure high probability state”, Is defined.
During the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a first probability (hereinafter, referred to as “low probability”).
During the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a second probability (hereinafter, "high probability") higher than the first probability.
The main control circuit 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are synchronized. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery means the probability of winning a "hit"("big hit 1" to "big hit 6") at which the big hit gaming state is generated.
In particular, in pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a combination of a value (set value) set in the setting information storage area and a gaming state (special figure low probability state or special figure high probability state) It is the probability according to the match.
Specifically, during the occurrence of the setting value = “1” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 319.69. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “1” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 32.13.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “2” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 312.08. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “2” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 31.36.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “3” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 304.82. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “3” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 30.62.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “4” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 297.89. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “4” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.93.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “5” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 291.27. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “5” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.26.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “6” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 284.94. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “6” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 28.62.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the selection probability of the jackpot symbol is a probability according to the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area.
Specifically, when the first special symbol lottery is won, one of the "big hit" symbols and "big hit 2 symbols" is selected. At this time, if the setting value is “1” to “3”, the selection probability of “big hit symbol 1” becomes 50/100 and the selection probability of “big hit symbol 2” becomes 50/100 ( See FIG. 44 (a)). On the other hand, when the setting value is “4” to “6”, the selection probability of “big hit symbol 1” is 70/100 and the selection probability of “big hit symbol 2” is 30/100 (see FIG. 44 (b)).
Further, when the second special symbol lottery is won, one big hit symbol is selected from "big hit 3 symbol" to "big hit 6 symbol". Under the present circumstances, when setting value = "1"-"3", the selection probability of "big hit symbol 3" becomes 25/100, and the selection probability of "big hit symbol 4" becomes 25/100, " The selection probability of the jackpot symbol 5 is 25/100, and the selection probability of the jackpot symbol 6 is 25/100 (see FIG. 45A). On the other hand, when the setting value is “4” to “6”, the selection probability of “big hit symbol 3” is 30/100, and the selection probability of “big hit symbol 4” is 30/100, “big hit” The selection probability of the symbol 5 "is 30/100, and the selection probability of the" big hit symbol 6 "is 10/100 (see FIG. 45 (b)).

When the "big hit 2" or the "big hit 6" is won, the "special figure low probability state" is generated in a period from the end of the big hit gaming state to the next occurrence of the big hit gaming state.
On the other hand, when the player wins "big hit 1" or "big hit 3" to "big hit 5", the "special figure high probability state" is generated according to the end of the big hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, the "special figure high probability state" is started in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, and ended in response to the start of the next big hit gaming state (end of the stop display of the "big hit symbol").
In addition, the “special figure high probability state” is started according to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the number of special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state” is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10000 [ It does not matter as a configuration that is terminated (the “special figure low probability state” is generated) in response to having reached the
In the case of winning "big hit 1" to "big hit 6", time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state.
The time saving control is started in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, that a special symbol lottery has been won ("big hit symbol" has been stopped and displayed), and a predetermined number of short time (in this embodiment, 70 [times] The special symbol notification display (variation display and stop display) of) is executed in response to one of the execution being completed.

Next, a method of selecting the type of stop symbol and a method of selecting a stop symbol (segment data) to be stopped and displayed on each special view display device (special view 1 display device or special view 2 display device) will be described.
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol lottery table and a segment data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol lottery table and a segment data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.
FIG. 44 (a) shows a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the case where the setting value is “1” to “3”. Further, FIG. 44 (b) shows a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the case where the setting value is “4” to “6”. Further, FIG. 44 (c) shows a winning time segment data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery.
Further, FIG. 45 (a) shows a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the case where the setting value is “1” to “3”. Further, FIG. 45 (b) shows a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the case where the setting value is “4” to “6”. Further, FIG. 45 (c) shows a winning time segment data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.
In the pachinko machine 1, as a type of stop symbol, “detachable symbol” and “big hit symbol” are defined. In the present embodiment, only one type ("deletion symbol") is defined as the type of "deletion symbol". On the other hand, six types ("big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 6 symbol") are defined as the type of "big hit symbol".
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, when the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is executed, the type of the stop symbol is selected.
Under the present circumstances, when losing a special symbol lottery (the 1st special symbol lottery or the 2nd special symbol lottery), as a type of the stop symbol, the "outside symbol" is selected.
On the other hand, when winning the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), one of the six big hit symbol types is selected as the type of the stop symbol.

The ROM 220 stores a big hit symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the hit symbol random number and the type of the big hit symbol is registered.
Further, as a big hit symbol lottery table, a first big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to a first special symbol lottery and a second big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to a second special symbol lottery are stored.
In addition, as the first jackpot symbol lottery table, the first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the set value = "1" to "3", and corresponds to the set value = "4" to "6". A first jackpot symbol lottery table is stored.
Furthermore, as the second big hit symbol lottery table, the second big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the set value = "1" to "3" and the set value = "4 to 6" are supported. A second jackpot symbol lottery table is stored.
Then, in each first big hit symbol lottery table, "big hit 1 symbol" and "big hit 2 symbol" are registered as types of big hit symbols. On the other hand, "big hit 3 symbols" to "big hit 6 symbols" are registered in each second big hit symbol lottery table as a type of big hit symbol.

In particular, the first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = “1” to “3” and the first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = “4” to “6”. The selection probability of each big hit symbol type ("big hit 1 symbol" and "big hit 2 symbol" respectively) is different from each other.
In addition, the second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = "1" to "3" and the second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = "4" to "6". The selection probability of each big hit symbol type (each of 'big hit 3 symbols' to 'big hit 6 symbols') is different from each other.
In the present embodiment, the second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value “1” to “3” and the second jackpot corresponding to the setting value “4” to “6”. With the symbol lottery table, the selection probability of the type of each big hit symbol is different from each other for all of "big hit 3 symbols" to "big hit 6 symbols". However, the second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = “1” to “3” and the second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = “4” to “6”. The selection probability of the type of the jackpot symbol may be different from each other for at least one jackpot symbol type among "big hit 3 symbols" to "big hit 6 symbols".

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the value of the winning symbol random number is updated within the range of “0” to “99”.
And as shown to Fig.44 (a), in the 1st big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to when setting value = "1"-"3", the value of hit symbol random number = "0"-"49" If there is a "big hit 1 symbol" in a certain case and the hit symbol random number value is "50" to "99", the "big hit 2 symbol" is selected.
Thereby, in the first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = "1" to "3", the selection probability of "big hit 1 symbol" = 50%, the selection probability of "big hit 2 symbol" = 50% It has become.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), in the first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = "4" to "6", the value of the hit symbol random number is "0" to "69". In a case where "big hit 1 symbol" is selected and the value of hit symbol random number = "70" to "99", "big hit 2 symbol" is selected.
By this, in the first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = "4" to "6", the selection probability of "big hit 1 symbol" = 70%, the selection probability of "big hit 2 symbol" = 30% It has become.
Also, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), in the second big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = “1” to “3”, the value of the hit symbol random number is “0” to “24”. In the case where "big hit 3 symbols" is selected and the hit symbol random number value is "25" to "49", "big hit 4 symbols" is selected, and the hit symbol random number value is "50" to "74. If "big hit 5 symbols" is selected and the value of the hit symbols random number is "75" to "99", "big hit 6 symbols" is selected.
By this, in the second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = "1" to "3", the selection probability of "big hit 3 symbols" = 25%, the selection probability of "big hit 4 symbols" = 25% The selection probability of "5 symbols for the big hit" is 25%, and the selection probability for 6 symbols for the "big hit" is 25%.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the second big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = “4” to “6”, the value of the hit symbol random number is “0” to “29”. In the case where "big hit 3 symbols" is selected and the hit symbol random number value is "30" to "59", "big hit 4 symbols" is selected, and the hit symbol random number value is "60" to "89. If "big hit 5 symbols" is selected and the value of the hit symbols random number = "90" to "99", "big hit 6 symbols" is selected.
By this, in the second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the setting value = "4" to "6", the selection probability of "big hit 3 symbols" = 30%, the selection probability of "big hit 4 symbols" = 30% The selection probability of “5 symbols for the big hit” is 30%, and the selection probability for 6 symbols for the “big hit” is 10%.

And, in the pachinko machine 1, when winning the special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol (big hit symbol) is selected as follows.
That is, when the first special symbol lottery is won, first, the first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the value (setting value) stored in the setting information storage area is read out. Then, based on the acquired winning symbol random number and the read first big hit symbol lottery table, the type of big hit symbol (one of the "big hit 1 symbol" and "big hit 2 symbol" symbol) Type is selected.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is won, first, the second big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the value (setting value) stored in the setting information storage area is read out. Then, based on the acquired winning symbol random number and the read second big hit symbol lottery table, the type of big hit symbol (any of the 3 symbols from "big hit" to "6 symbols for big hit") Type is selected.

Moreover, in pachinko machine 1, as a stop symbol (segment data, stop symbol number) to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device), the stop symbol corresponding to "outside symbol" , A stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit symbol" is defined.
Furthermore, a stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are defined as the stop symbol (segment data / stop symbol number) corresponding to the "big hit symbol".
In this embodiment, a plurality of (specifically, 300) stop symbols having different display modes are defined as the stop symbols (segment data and stop symbol numbers).
That is, as the stop symbols (segment data and stop symbol numbers) corresponding to the "disappeared symbols", a plurality of (specifically, 100) stop symbols having different display modes are defined.
In addition, as stop symbols (segment data and stop symbol numbers) corresponding to the "big hit symbols" pertaining to the first special symbol lottery, a plurality of (specifically, 100 ways) stop symbols are defined which are different display modes. There is.
Furthermore, as stop symbols (segment data and stop symbol numbers) corresponding to the "big hit symbols" pertaining to the second special symbol lottery, a plurality of (specifically, 100 different) stop symbols are defined which become different display modes. There is.
And, in the pachinko machine 1, when the special symbol lottery (the 1st special symbol lottery or the 2nd special symbol lottery) is executed, one of the 300 stop symbols (segment data and stop symbol number), one of the stop symbols Is selected.

The ROM 220 stores a segment data table in which the correspondence between the value of the hit symbol random number and the stop symbol (segment data) is registered.
In addition, as the segment data table, the winning segment data table corresponding to the case where the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is won, and the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special) And a seg data table at the time of failure selection corresponding to a case where the game is lost in the symbol lottery).
Furthermore, as a winning segment data table, a winning segment data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a winning segment data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored.
In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is disqualified, regardless of the value (setting value) stored in the setting information storage area, the same time of failure A stop symbol is selected using the data table (or the same-value in-selection segment data table).
In addition, when winning a special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), the same winning time segment data table (without regard to the value (setting value) stored in the setting information storage area Alternatively, the stop symbol is selected by using the same time of winning segment data table).

A stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) corresponding to each value (each of “0” to “99”) of the hit symbol random number is registered in the winning selection segment data table (not shown). That is, 100 kinds of stop symbols (segment data and stop symbol numbers) are registered in the unsuccessful selection segment data table. Specifically, “segment data C0” to “segment data C99” are registered in the unsuccessful segment data table.
More specifically, "segment data C0" is defined as the segment data corresponding to the winning symbol random number value "0" in the winning segment data table, and as the segment data corresponding to the hitting symbol random number value "1". "Seg data C1" is defined, and "Seg data C2" is defined as segment data corresponding to the value of the symbol random number = "2", ... as segment data corresponding to the value of the symbol random number "99". "Seg data C 99" is defined.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), the winning segment data table (not shown) corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, each value of the winning symbol random number (each of "0" to "99") The stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) corresponding to is registered. That is, 100 kinds of stop symbols (segment data) are registered in the winning segment data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, “segment data A0” to “segment data A99” are registered in the winning time segment data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery.
Specifically, "Seg data A0" is defined in the winning segment data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery as segment data corresponding to the value of the symbol random number = "0", and the value of the symbol random number = " “Seg data A1” is defined as segment data corresponding to “1”, “Seg data A2” is defined as segment data corresponding to per symbol random number value = “2”,... Per symbol random number value = “99” As segment data corresponding to “, segment data A 99” is defined.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the winning time segment data table (not shown) corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, each value of the winning symbol random number (each of "0" to "99") The stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) corresponding to is registered. That is, 100 kinds of stop symbols (segment data) are registered in the winning segment data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery. Specifically, "segment data B0" to "segment data B99" are registered in the winning time segment data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.
In detail, "Seg data B0" is defined as the segment data corresponding to the value of the winning symbol random number = "0" in the winning segment data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, and the value of the hitting symbol random number = " “Seg data B1” is defined as segment data corresponding to “1”, “Seg data B2” is defined as segment data corresponding to per symbol random number value = “2”,... Per symbol random number value = “99” As segment data corresponding to “, segment data B 99” is defined.
Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol displayed based on "segment data A0" to "segment data A99" and "segment data B0" to "segment data B99" becomes "big hit symbol", and "segment data C0" to "segment data The stop symbol displayed on the basis of "C99" is "off symbol".

Then, in the pachinko machine 1, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the stop symbol (segment data) is selected as follows.
That is, when the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is unsuccessfully selected, first, the in-selection segment data table is read out. Then, the stop symbol (one segment data out of "segment data C0" to "segment data C99") is selected based on the acquired hit symbol random number and the read-out selected segment data table.
On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is won, first, the winning segment data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is read out. Then, the stop symbol (one segment data out of "segment data A0" to "segment data A 99") is selected based on the acquired hit symbol random number and the read-out winning-time segment data table.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is won, first, the winning segment data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is read out. Then, the stop symbol (one segment data out of "segment data B0" to "segment data B99") is selected based on the acquired hit symbol random number and the read-out winning-time segment data table.
Then, in the special view display device (the special view 1 display device or the special view 2 display device), the stop symbol based on the selected segment data is stopped and displayed. At this time, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, a stop symbol based on the selected segment data is stopped and displayed on the special view 1 display device. On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the stop symbol based on the selected segment data is stopped and displayed on the special view 2 display device.

By the above, as shown to FIG. 44 (a) and (c), when it is setting value = "1"-"3", the stop symbol which concerns on "segment data A0"-"segment data A49" is "big hit" The stop symbol related to "segment data A50" to "segment data A99" is "big hit 2 symbol".
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44 (b) and (c), when the setting values are "4" to "6", the stop symbols related to "segment data A0" to "segment data A69" are "big hit 1". The stop symbols related to "segment data A70" to "segment data A99" are "big hit 2 symbols".
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (c), when the setting values are “1” to “3”, the stop symbols relating to “segment data B0” to “segment data B24” are “big hit 3”. The stop symbols for "segment data B25" to "segment data B49" are "big hit 4 symbols", and the stop symbols for "segment data B50" to "segment data B74" are "big hit 5 symbols", and "segment data The stop symbol concerning B75 "-" segment data B99 "turns into" big hit 6 symbol ".
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c), in the case of set values = "4" to "6", the stop symbols related to "segment data B0" to "segment data B29" are "big hit 3". The stop symbols for "segment data B30" to "segment data B59" are "big hit 4 symbols", and the stop symbols for "segment data B60" to "segment data B 89" are "big hit 5 symbols", and "segment data The stop symbols related to B90 "to" Seg data B99 "are" big hit 6 symbols ".

Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1, the combination of the type of big hit symbol (type of big hit gaming state) and the stop symbol which is stopped and displayed on the special view display device (special view 1 display device or special view 2 display device) , Can suggest the set value.
That is, when the setting values are “1” to “3”, the stop symbols related to “segment data A50” to “segment data A69” can be stopped and displayed only when “big hit 2 symbols” is selected.
On the other hand, when the setting values are “4” to “6”, the stop symbols related to “Seg data A50” to “Seg data A69” can be stopped and displayed only when “big hit 1 symbol” is selected.
Therefore, as a result of one first special symbol lottery, the stop symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol" is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4 (= "big hit 2 symbol" is selected), and In the display device of FIG. 1, when the stop symbols relating to “segment data A50” to “segment data A69” are displayed in a stopped state, it is suggested that the setting values are “1” to “3”.
On the other hand, as a result of one first special symbol lottery, the stop symbol corresponding to the "probable variation" is stopped and displayed (= "big hit 1 symbol" is selected) in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, and In the display device of FIG. 1, when the stop symbols relating to “segment data A50” to “segment data A69” are displayed in a stopped state, it is suggested that the setting values are “4” to “6”.
For example, when the stop symbol (display mode) displayed based on "segment data A60" is set to "○ × ○", a setting value is suggested as follows.
That is, as a result of one first special symbol lottery, “2, 2, 2” (“normal symbol”) is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, and “special figure 1 display device When 示 唆 × 停止 is stopped and displayed, it is suggested that the setting values are “1” to “3”.
On the other hand, as a result of one first special symbol lottery, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, "7, 7, 7"("probablesymbol") is stopped and displayed, and in the special view 1 display device, " When 示 唆 × 停止 is stopped and displayed, it is suggested that the setting values are “4” to “6”.

Similarly, when the setting values are “1” to “3”, the stop symbols related to “Seg data B 25” to “Seg data B 29” can be stopped and displayed only when “big hit 4” is selected.
On the other hand, when the setting values are “4” to “6”, the stop symbols related to “Seg data B 25” to “Seg data B 29” can be stopped and displayed only when “big hit 3 symbols” is selected.
Therefore, in the special figure 2 display device, the stop symbol which relates to “segment data B25”-“segment data B29” is stopped and displayed, and it is executed during occurrence of the big hit game state which is started according to the display of the stop symbol. When the number of round games is 15 [times] ("big hit 3 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting values = "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the special figure 2 display device, the stop symbol concerning "segment data B25"-"segment data B29" is stopped and displayed, and it is executed during occurrence of the big hit gaming state started according to the display of the stop symbol. When the number of round games is 10 [times] ("big hit 4 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting value = "1" to "3".
For example, when the stop symbol (display mode) displayed based on "segment data B27" is "○ ××", a setting value is suggested as follows.
That is, in the special view 2 display device, 15 rounds of round games were executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state in which “○ ××” is stopped and displayed and started in response to the stopped display ( When "big hit 3 symbols" is selected, it is suggested that the setting values = "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the special view 2 display device, 10 [times] round games were executed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state started being displayed in response to the stop display of "○ ××" When "big hit 4 symbols" is selected, it is suggested that the setting value = "1" to "3".

Similarly, when the setting values are “1” to “3”, the stop symbols related to “Seg data B50” to “Seg data B59” can be stopped and displayed only when “big hit 5 design” is selected.
On the other hand, when the setting value is “4” to “6”, the stop symbols related to “Seg data B50” to “Seg data B59” can be stopped and displayed only when “big hit 4 symbol” is selected.
Therefore, in the special figure 2 display device, the stop design which relates to “segment data B50”-“segment data B 59” is stopped and displayed, and it is executed during occurrence of the big hit game state which is started according to the display of the stop symbol. When the number of round games is 10 [times] ("big hit 4 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting value = "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the special figure 2 display device, the stop symbol which relates to “segment data B50”-“segment data B 59” is stopped and displayed, and it is executed during occurrence of the big hit gaming state started according to the display of the stop symbol. When the number of round games is 5 [times] ("big hit 5 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting value = "1" to "3".
For example, when the stop symbol (display mode) displayed based on "segment data B52" is "Δ × ○", the set value is suggested as follows.
That is, in the special view 2 display device, 10 [times] of round games were executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state in which “Δ × ○” is stopped and displayed and started in response to the stopped display ( When "big hit 4 symbols" is selected, it is suggested that the setting values = "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the special view 2 display device, 5 [times] round games were executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state in which “Δ × ○” is stop-displayed and started in response to the stop display ( When "big hit 5 symbols" is selected, it is suggested that the setting value is "1" to "3".

Similarly, when the setting values are “1” to “3”, the stop symbols related to “Seg data B 75” to “Seg data B 89” can be stopped and displayed only when “big hit 6 design” is selected.
On the other hand, when the setting values are “4” to “6”, the stop symbols related to “Seg data B 75” to “Seg data B 89” can be stopped and displayed only when “big hit 5 design” is selected.
Therefore, in the special view 2 display device, after the stop symbol related to "segment data B75" to "segment data B89" is stopped and displayed, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state started according to the display of the stop symbol, "special When the figure high probability state is generated ("big hit 5 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting value = "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the special figure 2 display device, after the stop symbol related to "segment data B75" to "segment data B89" is stopped and displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state started according to the display of the stop symbol When the figure "low probability state" is generated ("big hit 6 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting value = "1" to "3".
For example, when the stop symbol (display mode) displayed based on "segment data B77" is set to "x △」 ", a set value is suggested as follows.
That is, in the special figure 2 display device, the “special figure high probability state” is generated after the “× Δ ○” is stopped and displayed and the big hit gaming state started in response to the stop is ended (“ It is suggested that setting value = "4"-"6", when "the big hit 5 designs" is selected.
On the other hand, in the special figure 2 display device, the “special figure low probability state” is generated after the “× Δ ○” is stopped and displayed and the big hit gaming state started in response to the stop indication is ended ( When "big hit 6 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting values = "4" to "6".

(About control command)
Next, a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 and a control command transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 will be described.
The main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, and communication from the effect control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 200 is performed. It does not happen.
Each control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 is composed of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the content of the control command. There is.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command including upper data and lower data to the effect control circuit 300 by serial communication. In the effect control circuit 300, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, as control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, a symbol type designation command, a fluctuation mode designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a gaming state designation command, the number of reservations A designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a first prefetch designation command, a second prefetch designation command, a third prefetch designation command, and the like are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type of stop symbol (one of the “off symbol” and “big hit 1 symbol” to “big hit 6 symbol”). The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, as the symbol type designation command, one corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is set.

The fluctuation mode designation command is a command for specifying the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number). The fluctuation mode designation command designates a fluctuation mode number and thereby designates a fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation mode number. The fluctuation mode designating command designates the fluctuation time of the first half period (a form of the first half period of fluctuation effect) in the fluctuation display of the special symbol (variation effect).
In the present embodiment, m (a plurality of) types of different fluctuation times are set as the type of fluctuation mode. Then, the fluctuation mode designation command designates one of “m types of fluctuation mode (variation mode number)” (“variation mode m”).
The variation pattern specification command is a command for specifying the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The fluctuation pattern designation command designates a fluctuation pattern number, thereby specifying a fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern number. The fluctuation pattern designation command designates the fluctuation time of the second half period (a form of the second half period of fluctuation effect) in the fluctuation display of the special symbol (variation effect).
In the present embodiment, n (a plurality of) types of variation patterns having different variation times are set as the variation pattern types. Then, the variation pattern designation command designates one of “n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number)” (“variation pattern n”).
The fluctuation mode designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command are transmitted at the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol.

The stop designation command is a command for designating stop display of the special symbol (effect symbol z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the stop display of the special symbol.
The game state specification command is a command for specifying a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the “playing state offset value” is information for specifying a playing state. In the present embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, the combination of the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the big hit post revolution counter The corresponding numerical value is set.
Then, the gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the special game phase to be described later is changed, or the like.
Here, as the gaming state offset value, the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, the value of the big hit post counter, and the setting information storage area are stored. It does not matter as a structure where the numerical value corresponding to each of the combination of the value (setting value) is set. Then, when transmitting the game state specification command, the value of the time reduction control flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the number of turns after the big hit Check the value of the counter and the value stored in the setting information storage area, calculate the game state offset value corresponding to the check result, and specify the game state specification command to specify the calculated game state offset value It may be configured to be stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 (sent to the effect control circuit 300).

The hold count specification command is a command for specifying the hold count. In this embodiment, the number-of-holds specification command specifies that the number of reservations (Toku Figure 1 number of reservations or number of special events 2 reservations) has increased by one, that the number of reservations has decreased by one, the number of reservations, etc. .
Here, the "special figure 1 reservation number" means the number by which the notification display (the variation display and the stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device is being held. Moreover, the "special figure 2 reservation number" means the number by which the alerting | reporting display (a fluctuation display and stop display) of the 2nd special symbol in a special figure 2 display apparatus is suspended.
The number-of-holds specification command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the start information is stored, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, or the like. In the present embodiment, commands corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the number-of-holds designation command.

The opening designating command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (the start of the jackpot gaming state). The opening designation command designates the type of the big hit gaming state to be started (= type of stop symbol (one type out of "big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 6 symbol")). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the jackpot gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command to designate the start of a round game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game.
The round end designation command is a command to designate the end of the round game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game.
The ending specification command is a command to specify the start of the ending period. The ending designation command is transmitted at the start of the ending period.

The first pre-reading designation command is a command for designating the type of stop symbol (one type out of “defect symbol” and “big hit 1 symbol” to “big hit 6 symbol”). In the present embodiment, the first pre-reading designated command corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is set.
The second prefetch designation command is a command for designating the contents of the fluctuation mode. Specifically, the second prefetch specification command indicates that the type of fluctuation mode is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of m types of fluctuation modes (variation mode numbers) ("fluctuation mode m" Specify). The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when storing the start information.
The third prefetch designation command is a command for designating the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third prefetch specification command indicates that the type of variation pattern is indeterminate (“indefinite value”), or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) (“variation pattern n”) Specify). The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when storing the start information.

The main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is performed bidirectionally. Each control command transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is composed of 1-byte data.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400 by serial communication. In the payout control circuit 400, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Further, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a control command to the main control circuit 200 by serial communication. In the main control circuit 200, when a control command is received from the payout control circuit 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.
In the pachinko machine 1, as a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400, a winning ball number specification command or the like is set.
The award ball number specification command is a command for designating the number of award balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the winning balls number designation command designates the payout of n (n = 1 to 15) winning balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the payout control circuit 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as a control command transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200, occurrence / cancellation of error during payout, occurrence / cancellation of full tank error, occurrence / cancellation of ball clogging error, etc. Control commands to specify each are set. Each control command is transmitted upon detection of occurrence / cancellation of various errors.

(Process executed by main control circuit 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control circuit 200 will be described.
First, functions of hardware configured in the main control circuit 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the hard random number generation circuit 270 starts hard random number update processing.
In the hard random number update process, each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (in the present embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]), the values of the first to third loop counters fall within a predetermined range. In the inside (in the present embodiment, in the range of 0 to 65535), “1” is updated one by one.
Further, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range (this time every 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment)). In the embodiment, “1” is updated in the range of 0 to 1006).
Then, the hard random number updating process updates the normal random symbol random number, the first special symbol lottery big hit random number, the second special symbol lottery big hit random number, and the reach group random number, respectively. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the hard random number generation circuit 270 (hardware), and is executed independently of a process that the CPU 210 described later executes based on software.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the transmission shift register of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmits the control command stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control circuit 300 or the payout control circuit 400. Start control command transmission processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on software.

Each output port 0, 1, 4 includes a plurality of output terminals and a port register. In addition, the port register is configured to include a bit corresponding to each output terminal (an area in which control data specifying output or stop is set). Each output port 0, 1, 4 controls the output of the control signal from the output terminal corresponding to the bit according to the value of each bit included in the port register.
At this time, for each bit included in the port register, each output port 0, 1, 4 outputs the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit when the value of the bit is “0”. When the value of the bit is “1”, the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is set to high level (output).
Specifically, the output port 0 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to each data signal for controlling the lighting of the main display 60. That is, the output port 0 has an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA0", an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA1", an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA2", an output terminal corresponding to "SEGDATA3", and "SEGDATA4". An output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA5”, an output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA6”, and an output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA7” are provided.
Also, the port register of output port 0 includes a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA0", a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA1", a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA2", a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA3", and "SEGDATA4". A corresponding bit, a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA5", a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA6", and a bit corresponding to "SEGDATA7" are included.
Thus, for example, when “0” is set as the value of the bit corresponding to “SEGDATA0” of the port register, the data signal (“SEGDATA0”) output from the output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA0” is It will be low level. On the other hand, when “1” is set as the value of the bit corresponding to “SEGDATA0” of the port register, the data signal (“SEGDATA0”) output from the output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA0” is at high level. Become.

Further, the output port 1 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to each common signal for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. That is, the output port 1 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to "COM0", an output terminal corresponding to "COM1", an output terminal corresponding to "COM2", and an output terminal corresponding to "COM3" It is done.
The port register of output port 1 includes a bit corresponding to "COM0", a bit corresponding to "COM1", a bit corresponding to "COM2", and a bit corresponding to "COM3". .
Thus, for example, when "0" is set as the value of the bit corresponding to "COM1" of the port register, the data signal ("COM1") output from the output terminal corresponding to "COM1" is It will be low level. On the other hand, when "1" is set as the value of the bit corresponding to "COM1" of the port register, the data signal ("COM1") output from the output terminal corresponding to "COM1" is at high level. Become.

Further, the output port 4 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to each data signal for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61. That is, in the output port 4, an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA0", an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA1", an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA2", an output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA3", and "7SEGDATA4 An output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA5”, an output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA6”, and an output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA7” are provided.
In addition, the port register of output port 4 includes a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA0", a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA1", a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA2", a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA3", and "7SEGDATA4". A corresponding bit, a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA5", a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA6", and a bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA7" are included.
Thus, for example, when "0" is set as the value of the bit corresponding to "7SEGDATA4" of the port register, the data signal ("7SEGDATA4") output from the output terminal corresponding to "7SEGDATA4" is It will be low level. On the other hand, when “1” is set as the value of the bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA4” of the port register, the data signal (“SEGDATA0”) output from the output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA4” is at high level. Become.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control circuit 200 based on a program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, the boot program is read from the ROM 220, and settings necessary to execute various processes are performed.
In step S1-2, a weight processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time is set in the timer counter. Then, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started. Also, read the RAM clear signal.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a ram clear switch (not shown). Then, when the power is turned on while the ram clear switch is pressed, a ram clear signal is input to the input port 240 (input port 1).
In the RAM clear signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal of the input port 240 is read.

In step S1-3, it is determined whether the weight processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and when it is determined that the weight processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the weight processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, the RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, the process necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.
In step S1-5, it is determined whether "1" is set in the backup effective flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that "1" is set in the backup effective flag area (Yes), If it is determined that "0" is set in the backup effective flag area (No), the process proceeds to step S1-17.

In step S1-6, the use area checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-7. In the use area checksum calculation process, a check sum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 in the backup information.
In step S1-7, the non-use area checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the non-use area checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F210H to F228H) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in steps S1-6 and S1-7 is normal, and when it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), step S1-9 is performed. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-17.
Here, "the value of the checksum of the use area M1 calculated in step S1-6 matches the value of the checksum of the use area M1 stored in the checksum buffer area" and "step S1-". If the value of the checksum of the non-use area M2 calculated in 7 matches the value of the checksum of the non-use area M2 stored in the checksum buffer area, Determine that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, “the value of the checksum of the use area M1 calculated in step S1-6 matches the value of the checksum of the use area M1 stored in the checksum buffer area” and “step S1-7 That the value of the checksum of the non-use area M2 calculated in the above matches the value of the checksum of the non-use area M2 stored in the checksum buffer area, at least one of the conditions is satisfied. If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, it is determined based on the value read in step S1-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal) whether or not the ram clear signal is input, and the ram clear signal When it is determined that the input is not made (No), the process proceeds to step S1-10, and when it is determined that the ram clear signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
In step S1-10, backup effective flag cancellation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-11. In the backup valid flag cancellation process, “0” is set in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-11, initialization processing upon power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-12. In the power supply recovery initialization process, the data of the RAM 230 to be initialized (cleared) at power recovery (when maintaining data before power-off) is initialized.
In step S1-12, a power recovery sub-command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-13. In the power recovery sub-command transmission process, a sub-command (a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300) specifying that the power has been recovered from shutdown is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 Do. Also, a subcommand specifying a value set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-13, a power supply return payment command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the power recovery return payout command transmission process, a payout command (a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400) for designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. Do.

In step S1-14, the effect return sub-command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the effect recovery sub-command transmission process, sub-commands for effect recovery (power recovery return phase designation command, gaming state designation command, power recovery return command, etc.) are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the "power recovery return phase designation command" is a control command for designating a special game phase for returning an effect.
In the effect return sub-command transmission process, first, based on the value of the special game phase flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230, the current special game phase is confirmed. Then, the power recovery phase designation command specifying the confirmed special game phase is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In addition, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. Specifically, check the value of the time reduction control flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the big hit post revolution counter Then, the game state offset value corresponding to the check result is calculated. Then, a gaming state designation command for designating the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-15, an interrupt setting process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the interrupt initialization process, the peripheral devices CTC (counter / timer circuit) are initialized.
Specifically, the CPU 210 sets an interrupt vector register, and sets an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) in the CTC.

In step S1-16, the setting value change permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1).
In the setting value change permission process, first, it is determined whether the setting value change permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value change permission condition is satisfied, “1” is set in the setting value change permission flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, “0” is set in the setting value change permission flag area of the RAM 230.
In the present embodiment, both “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integral door unit 4 is opened)”. It is determined that the set value change condition is satisfied when the condition of is satisfied.
On the other hand, at least one of "the detection signal being input from key rotation detection switch 111" and "the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integral door unit 4 is opened)". If the above condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is not satisfied.
Note that if both the conditions that “a detection signal is input from key rotation detection switch 111” and “the door open information (external signal) is being output” are satisfied, the setting value change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that at least one of the conditions that “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the door open information (external signal) is being output” is not satisfied, It may be determined that the value change condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-17, the non-use area initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-18. In the non-use area initialization process, the non-use area M2 of the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the non-use area initialization process, the information stored in the non-use area M2 is cleared (initialized). As a result, the work area and stack area of the non-use area M2 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
In step S1-18, use area initialization processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the use area initialization process, the use area M1 of the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the use area initialization process, the information stored in the use area M1 is cleared (initialized). As a result, the work area and the stack area of the use area M1 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
That is, predetermined initial values are set as values of various flag areas (time reduction control flag area, special high probability state flag area, previous big hit symbol flag area, special game phase flag area, normal game phase flag area, etc.) . Further, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the various counter areas (time reduction counter area, large hit post-rotation counter area, etc.). Furthermore, in the setting information storage area, a predetermined initial value ("3" in the present embodiment) is set.
In the present embodiment, if the checksum is not normal, the non-use area M2 is initialized and then the use area M1 is initialized. On the other hand, when the checksum is normal, the use area M1 is initialized only when the RAM clear signal is input.
As a result, as long as the checksum is normal, even if the RAM clear signal is input, the non-use area M2 is not initialized. Therefore, even if the RAM clear switch is operated, information on the base ratio (not use It is possible to maintain the information stored in the area M2.

In step S1-19, a sub-command transmission process at the time of RAM clearing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand specifying that the RAM clear is performed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. Further, a subcommand specifying the value (setting value = “3”) set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-20, the RAM clear payment command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the RAM clear-time payout command transmission process, a payout command designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-16) shown in FIG. 6 is completed, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disabled state is set, the execution of the power-off save process, the timer interrupt process, and the like described later is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining an initial value and an end value of soft random numbers (per symbol random number, reach mode random number, fluctuation pattern random number, etc.) which are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within the range from the preset initial value to the end value. The initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random numbers are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, main command analysis processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command (a control command transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200) received from the payout control circuit 400 is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 250 (command output port 1).
As a result, the sub command input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the sub-commands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permitting process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enabling process, the interrupt disabled state is released. Thus, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permitting process in step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibiting process in step S2-1, execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. It becomes an interruption permission period.
In step S2-6, other random number updating processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number updating process, software random numbers excluding the winning symbol random number (reach mode random number, fluctuation pattern random number, etc.) are updated.

Next, a power-off evacuation process performed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the power-off evacuation process.
The power supply circuit 600 is connected to a power supply interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power shutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied by the power supply circuit 600, and outputs a power shutoff notice signal to the main control circuit 200 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value. .
When the power-off notice signal is received, the CPU 210 starts the power-off evacuation process shown in FIG. 8 during the interrupt permitting period of the main loop process. The power-off save process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the power-off save process is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power-off evacuation process is started, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register save process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the value of the register used during execution of the main loop process is saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, the power-off notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power-off notice signal reading process, the power-off notice signal from the power-off detection circuit is read.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-3, is whether or not the power shutoff notice signal is input from the power shutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutoff notice signal)? If it is determined (bit check) whether or not the power off notice signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power off notice signal is not input. In (No), the process proceeds to step S3-14.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 250 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped. In addition, the input of the detection signal to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3) is stopped.
In particular, in the output port stop processing, the values of all the bits contained in the port register of each output port 0, 1, 4 are initialized.
Specifically, in the output port stop process, the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA 0” to “SEGDATA 7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 is stopped. That is, “0” is set as the value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “SEGDATA 0” to “SEGDATA 7”) included in the port register of output port 0. As a result, the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA 0” to “SEGDATA 7”) is stopped (set to low level).
Further, in the output port stop process, the output of each common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61 is stopped. That is, “0” is set as the value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “COM 0” to “COM 3”) included in the port register of output port 1. As a result, the output of each common signal ("COM0" to "COM3") is stopped (low level).
Furthermore, in the output port stop processing, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 61 is stopped. That is, “0” is set as a value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) included in the port register of output port 4. As a result, the output of each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") is stopped (set to low level).

As described above, in the present embodiment, lighting of the main display 60 is controlled by processing based on a program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220. Control data (drive data) and control data (drive data) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 are initialized.
Here, the control data for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 is control data for controlling the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) (specifically, the port of output port 0) Control data for controlling the output of each common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) (specifically, each bit included in the port register of output port 1) Say the value of
Further, control data for controlling lighting of the performance display device 61 is control data for controlling output of each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") (specifically, a port register of the output port 4) Control data for controlling the output of each common signal (“COM 0” to “COM 3”) (specifically, for each bit included in the port register of output port 1) Value).
As a result, with regard to control data for controlling the lighting of the main display 60, a process (described later) based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 Processing (step S3) that is set by the main display data signal output processing (step S30-5) and stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 (program for controlling the progress of the game) The output port stop processing of -4 or the main display data signal clear processing of step S30-1 described later is initialized.
On the other hand, control data for controlling lighting of performance display device 61 is based on a program (program for controlling display of performance display device 61) stored in out-of-use area m2 (program area) of ROM 220. A process based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of a game) set by processing (performance display device data signal output processing in step S37-4 described later) and stored in use area m1 (program area) of ROM 220 (The output port stop process of step S3-4 or the performance display device data signal clear process of step S30-2 described later) is initialized.
Here, in the output port stop processing, the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area described later is cleared (initialized), and the performance display data signal control data described later The performance display device data signal control data set in the setting area may be cleared (initialized).

In step S3-5, the use area checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the use area checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-6, an unused area checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the non-use area checksum storage processing, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F210H to F228H) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-7, a backup effective flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the backup valid flag setting process, “1” is set in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-8, a RAM access prohibition process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-9, loop counter setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of reading of the power shutoff notice signal is set as the value of the recovery judgment loop counter.
In step S3-10, a power off notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-11. In the power-off notice signal reading process, the power-off notice signal from the power-off detection circuit is read.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-11, is whether or not the power shutoff notice signal is input from the power shutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-10 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutoff notice signal)? If it is determined that the power-off notice signal is not input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-12, and if it is determined that the power-off notice signal is input (Yes) The process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-12, loop counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-13. In the loop counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the return determination loop counter is newly set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-13, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU If it is determined that the value of the recovery determination loop counter is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S3-10.
In step S3-14, a register recovery process is performed, and a series of processes are completed to return to the original process. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the end of the register recovery process, the process returns to the main loop process (the program address designated by the stack pointer).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The frequency generation circuit 260 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in the present embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 during the interrupt permitting period of the main loop process. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt process is started, the process proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register save process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt enabling process, the interrupt is enabled.
In step S4-3, setting value management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. The setting value management process will be described later.
In step S4-4, dynamic port output processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. Dynamic port output processing will be described later.

In step S4-5, port input processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In port input processing, the latest switch state is accurately acquired.
Specifically, in the port input process, it is determined whether or not the on state is generated for each detection signal input to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3). At this time, based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each detection signal (each detection switch / detection sensor), it is determined whether the on state of the detection signal is generated. Then, when it is determined that the on state is generated for each detection signal, information indicating that the on state is generated (detected) for the detection signal is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230.
Here, the “on state” refers to a state in which the detection signal is changed from a state (low level) in which the detection signal is not input to a state in which the detection signal is input (high level).

In step S4-6, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-7. In the timer update process, various timers are updated. Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, external information timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-7, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-8. The initial value random number updating process of step S4-7 is the same process as the initial value random number updating process of step S2-2. Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-8, a hit symbol random number updating process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-9. In the hit symbol random number updating process, the value of the loop counter for generating the hit symbol random number is updated among the soft random numbers.
In step S4-9, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the switch management process, a process (such as acquisition of various random numbers) corresponding to the state of each of the switches 101, 102, and 104 (presence or absence of detection of the on state) is executed. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-10, an addition number calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. In the addition number calculation process, a value to be added to the out ball number counter described later and a value to be added to the payout number counter described later are calculated and set.
That is, in the addition number calculation process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined gaming state is established. Then, when it is determined that the game mode is not the predetermined game state, an additional number calculation process in non-predetermined game state to be described later is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game mode is a predetermined game state, a process for calculating an additional number during a predetermined game state to be described later is executed.
In the present embodiment, when the “special figure low probability state” is occurring and the time saving control is being stopped, it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is set. On the other hand, if at least one of the condition that the "special figure high probability state" is occurring and that the time saving control is being performed is satisfied, it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is not set.

In the non-predetermined gaming state addition number calculation process, first, the value stored in the out ball number addition value storage area is cleared, and the value stored in the payout number addition value storage area is cleared.
Next, “0” is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230.
Next, “0” is set as a value to be added to the number-of-payouts counter in the number-of-payouts addition storage area of the RAM 230.

On the other hand, in the predetermined gaming state addition number calculation process, first, the value stored in the out ball number addition value storage area is cleared, and the value stored in the payout number addition value storage area is cleared. In addition, “0” is set as the value of the payout amount calculation counter.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the on-state of the out switch 109 is detected, “1” is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when it is determined that the on-state of the out switch 109 is not detected, "0" is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 has been detected. When it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is detected, the value of the payout number calculation counter is paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the right other winning opening 54. Add the number "10". On the other hand, when it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is not detected, the addition to the value of the number-of-payouts calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 has been detected. When it is determined that the on state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is detected, the value of the payout number calculation counter is paid out according to the entry of the gaming ball to the left other winning opening 55 to 57. Add "10" which is the number of winning balls. On the other hand, when it is determined that the on state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is not detected, the addition to the value of the number-of-payouts calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the special view 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. Then, when it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start opening switch 101 is detected, the value of the counter for calculating the number of payouts is a prize ball to be paid out according to the entering of the gaming ball into the first start hole 51. Add the number "3". When it is determined that the on state of the special opening opening switch 101 is not detected, the addition to the value of the number-of-payouts calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the special view 2 start port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special view 2 start opening switch 102 is detected, the value of the payout number calculation counter is paid out according to the entering of the game ball into the second start opening 52. Add the number "1". When it is determined that the on state of the special opening opening switch 102 is not detected, the addition to the value of the number-of-payouts calculation counter is not executed.
Next, in the payout amount addition value storage area of the RAM 230, the value of the payout number calculation counter is set as a value to be added to the payout number counter.

In step S4-11, special game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the special game management process, the operation of the special view display device and the operation of the special motorized accessory 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-12, normal game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the normal game management process, the operation of the common drawing display device and the operation of the normal motorized accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, an error management process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the error management process, various errors (abnormal states) are determined, and settings are made according to the determination results.
In step S4-14, a winning opening switch process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (such as updating of various counters) corresponding to the state of each of the switches 101 to 103, 105, 106 (presence or absence of detection of the on state) is executed.
In step S4-15, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the winning ball control counter set in step S4-14, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of ball techniques balls entered in the big winning hole 53 is stored, and the number of ball balls in the right other prize holes 54 are stored. Ball control counter 2, the number of ball game balls entered in the upper left, left middle, lower left other winning openings 55 to 57 are stored, and the ball game ball entered in the first starting opening 51 The winning ball control counter 4 in which the number of balls is stored, and the winning ball control counter 5 in which the number of ball balls entering the second starting opening 52 are stored are set.

Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether the value of the winning ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number (15 [ball] in the present embodiment) of prize balls is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thus, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, when the payout of the winning balls by the gaming ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control circuit 200. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value of the winning ball control counter 1 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number (10 [ball] in the present embodiment) of prize balls is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thus, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the winning ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the winning ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number (10 [ball] in the present embodiment) of prize balls is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thus, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the winning ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number (3 [ball] in the present embodiment) of prize balls is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thus, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the winning ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number (1 [ball] in the present embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thus, a payout command for designating payout of a predetermined number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the winning ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

In step S4-16, a firing position specification management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the launch position specification management process, processing relating to the launch position specification is performed.
Specifically, in the launch position specification management process, when changing from a state where launch of the game ball to the left path is designated to a state where launch of the game ball to the right path is designated (at the start of the big hit gaming state etc.) Then, the sub command specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the sub command output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thus, a sub command designating launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.

In step S4-17, external information management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer 450 (or data display device) is set.
In the present embodiment, symbol determination frequency information (OUT1), starting opening information (OUT2), big hit as external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (hole computer 450, electronic device such as data display device) Information (OUT3 to OUT6), security information, out mouth payout number information (OUT8), setting value changing information, etc. are defined.
The “symbol determination number information” is external information regarding the number of times the special symbol lottery (the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol) is performed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination number information to the hall computer 450 (or the data display device) every time the number of times the stop display of the special symbol has been executed reaches a predetermined number.
The “starting opening information” is external information regarding entry of the game ball into the starting openings 51 and 52. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting opening information to the hall computer 450 (or data display device) each time the on state of the detection signal inputted from the starting opening switch 101, 102 is detected. .
The "big hit information" is external information on the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. The main control circuit 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the big hit information to the hall computer 450 (or data display device) each time the big hit gaming state is generated.
The “out-of-mouth payout information” is external information on the number of gaming balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of gaming balls discharged from the out port 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out mouth payout number information to the hall computer 450 each time the value of the out ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
The "setting value changing information" is external information indicating that the setting value is being changed (the setting value changing permission condition is satisfied). The CPU 210 always outputs an external signal corresponding to the setting value changing information to the hall computer 450 during a period in which the setting value changing flag area is set to “1”.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information fixed frequency counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information fixed frequency counter has reached a predetermined value, the symbol fixed frequency information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information fixed frequency counter. Thus, symbol determination number information (external signal) is output to the hole computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information start opening ball entry number counter has reached a predetermined value (one [time] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information start opening entry ball number counter has reached a predetermined value, the start opening information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information start opening ball entry number counter. As a result, starting port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information big hit counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information big hit counter has reached a predetermined value, the big hit information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information big hit counter. As a result, the big hit information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information out sphere number counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [sphere] in the present embodiment). Then, if it is determined that the value of the external information out ball number counter has reached a predetermined value, out port out payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (10 [sphere] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out ball number counter. As a result, out-of-mouth delivery information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether “1” is set in the setting value changing flag area. Then, when it is determined that “1” is set in the setting value changing flag area, the setting value changing information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the setting value changing information (external signal) is output to the hole computer 450.

In step S4-18, test signal management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the test signal management process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal management process is a process based on a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules. That is, the test signal management process is a process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called up during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal management process, information for a test (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit gaming state, execution state of time reduction control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) Remember to
In step S4-19, performance display device control processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. The performance display control process will be described later.
In step S4-20, LED display setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, control data (drive data) for lighting control of a predetermined display device is set in a dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-21, solenoid data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64 and 65 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-22, port output processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer 450, the solenoids 64 and 65, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer are output to the output port 250 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hole computer 450. Further, the solenoids 64 and 65 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, a register recovery process is executed, and a series of processes are completed to return to the original process. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the end of the register recovery process, the process returns to the main loop process (the program address designated by the stack pointer).

Next, the setting value management process of step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting value management processing.
When the setting value management process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 10, first, the process proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, it is determined whether "1" is set in the set value change permission flag area, and when it is determined that "1" is set in the set value change permission flag area (Yes) If it is determined that “0” is set in the setting value change permission flag area (No), the series of processes is ended and the next process (step S4-4) is performed. Move to).
In step S29-2, it is determined whether the set value change permission condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the set value change permission condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-3 and the set value If it is determined that the change permission condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S29-6.
As described above, both “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integral door unit 4 is opened)”. If the above condition is satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, at least one of "the detection signal being input from key rotation detection switch 111" and "the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integral door unit 4 is opened)". If the above condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is not satisfied.
Note that the setting value change condition is satisfied when both the condition that “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the door opening information (external signal) is being output” are satisfied. If it is determined that at least one of the condition that "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the door open information (external signal) is being output" is satisfied. Alternatively, it may be determined that the set value change condition is not satisfied.

In step S29-3, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the setting value selection switch 112. If it is determined that the detection signal is input from the setting value selection switch 112 (Yes), step S29 is performed. If it is determined that the detection signal is not input from the setting value selection switch 112 (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4).
In step S29-4, setting value change processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the setting value changing process, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed. Here, in the present embodiment, each time a detection signal is input from the setting value selection switch 112, a predetermined order (for example, setting value = “1”, setting value = “2”, setting value = “3”, setting The setting value is changed with the value of “4”, the setting value of “5”, the setting value of “6”, the setting value of “1”, the setting value of “2”,.
In step S29-5, the setting value display update process is executed, and the series of processes are ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the setting value display update process, the display of the setting value in the setting value display device 62 is updated.
Specifically, in the setting value display update process, first, a subcommand for specifying a value (setting value after change) set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In the setting value display update processing, next, the same value as the value (setting value after change) set in the setting information storage area is set in the setting value display counter. Thus, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the setting value display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the setting value display counter is controlled to light.
In the present embodiment, the display of the set value in the set value display device 62 is executed only during the period in which the set value change permission condition is satisfied.

In step S29-6, a setting value change end process is executed, a series of processes are ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4).
In the setting value change end processing, “0” is set in the setting value change permission flag area. Also, initialize (clear) the value of the set value display counter. As a result, all the segments constituting the set value display device 62 are turned off (display of the set values in the set value display device 62 is completed).

Next, the dynamic port output process of step S4-4 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing.
The dynamic port output process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the dynamic port output process is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-4, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the process proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, the main display data signal clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the main display data signal clear process, the values of all the bits contained in the port register of output port 0 are initialized.
Specifically, in the main display data signal clear process, “0” is set as the value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “SEGDATA 0” to “SEGDATA 7”) included in the port register of output port 0. Set
As a result, the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA 0” to “SEGDATA 7”) is stopped (set to low level).
Here, in the main display data signal clear processing, the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area may be cleared (initialized).

In step S30-2, performance display device data signal clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data signal clear process, the values of all the bits contained in the port register of output port 4 are initialized.
Specifically, in the performance display device data signal clear process, “0” is set as the value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) included in the port register of output port 4 Set
As a result, the output of each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") is stopped (set to low level).
Here, in the performance display device data signal clear process, the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data control data setting area may be cleared (initialized).

In step S30-3, common signal update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the common signal update process, the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area is updated.
Specifically, the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is configured to include a common signal control data setting area in which the common signal control data is set (stored).
The common signal control data is information for controlling the output / stop of each common signal (each of “COM 0” to “COM 3”).
In the present embodiment, “common signal control data 1” to “common signal control data 4” are defined as common signal control data.
“Common signal control data 1” is data specifying the output of “COM0” among “COM0” to “COM3” and designating stop of output of “COM1”, “COM2”, and “COM3”. There is.
“Common signal control data 2” is a data specifying the output of “COM1” among “COM0” to “COM3” and specifying the stopping of the output of “COM0”, “COM2” and “COM3” There is.
“Common signal control data 3” is a data specifying the output of “COM2” among “COM0” to “COM3” and specifying the stopping of the output of “COM0”, “COM1”, “COM3” There is.
“Common signal control data 4” is a data specifying the output of “COM3” among “COM0” to “COM3” and specifying the stopping of the output of “COM0”, “COM1”, “COM2” There is.
Then, in the common signal update processing, one common signal control data among “common signal control data 1” to “common signal control data 4” is set as a common signal control data setting area. At this time, each time the common signal update processing is executed, a predetermined sequence (for example, “common signal control data 1”, “common signal control data 2”, “common signal control data 3”, “common signal control data 4” The common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area is changed by “common signal control data 1”, “common signal control data 2”,.
Thus, each time the common signal update process is executed, the output is performed in a predetermined order (for example, “COM0”, “COM1”, “COM2”, “COM3”, “COM0”, “COM1”, etc.) Common signal (high level common signal) is switched.

In step S30-4, common signal output processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In common signal output processing, the output of each common signal (each of “COM 0” to “COM 3”) by the output port 1 is controlled according to the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area.
Specifically, in common signal output processing, each bit (“COM0” to “COM3”) included in the port register of output port 1 according to the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area Set the value of the corresponding bit).
Thus, for each bit included in the port register of output port 1, when the value of the bit is "1", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the high level, When the value of the bit = "0", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the low level.

In step S30-5, main display data signal output processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S30-6. In main display data signal output processing, according to the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area, each data signal (“SEGDATA 0” to “SEGDATA 7”) by output port 0 Control the output.
Specifically, the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is configured to include a main display data signal control data setting area in which the main display data signal control data is set (stored).
Here, the main display data signal control data includes segment data corresponding to the special view 1 display device, segment data corresponding to the special view 2 display device, segment data corresponding to the common view display device, and the like.
Then, in the main display data signal output process, each bit ("SEGDATA 0") included in the port register of output port 0 according to the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area ~ Set the value of the bit corresponding to each of "SEGDATA 7".
In this embodiment, the control data (included in the port register of output port 0) to be set in the port register of output port 0 based on the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area Control data specifying the value to be set to each bit to be selected / acquired. Then, the selected and acquired control data is set in the port register of the output port 0.
Thus, for each bit included in the port register of output port 0, when the value of the bit is "1", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the high level, When the value of the bit = "0", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the low level.

In step S30-6, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-7. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disabled state is set, the execution of the power-off save process, the timer interrupt process, and the like described later is prohibited.
In step S30-7, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-8. In the register save process, the value of the flag register is saved in the save area of the RAM.
In step S30-8, performance display device output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-9. The performance display device output process will be described later.
In step S30-9, a register recovery process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S30-10. In the register restoration process, the value of the flag register saved in step S30-7 is restored.
In step S30-10, an interrupt permitting process is executed, and a series of processes are ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-5). In the interrupt enabling process, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of the power-off save process, timer interrupt process, and the like is permitted.

Next, the performance display device output of step S30-8 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the performance display device output process is a process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. Performance display output processing is invoked during execution of dynamic port output processing.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S30-8, as shown in FIG. 12, first, the process proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, a stack pointer save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-2. In the stack pointer save process, the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the save area of the RAM.
In step S37-2, the out-of-area stack pointer setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-2. In the out-of-area stack pointer setting process, the stack pointer used for the process based on the program stored in the in-use area m2 is set.
In step S37-3, a register save process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S37-4. In the register save process, the value of the register used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S37-4, performance display device data signal output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the performance display device data signal output process, according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") by output port 4 Control the output.
Specifically, the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is configured to include a performance display data signal control data setting area in which the performance display data signal control data is set (stored).
Here, the performance display device data signal control data is configured to include segment data corresponding to the performance display device.
Then, in the performance display device data signal output process, each bit ("7 SEGDATA 0") included in the port register of output port 4 according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area. The value of the bit corresponding to each of "7SEGDATA7" is set.
In this embodiment, control data (included in the port register of output port 4) to be set in the port register of output port 4 based on the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area Control data specifying the value to be set to each bit to be selected / acquired. Then, the selected and acquired control data is set in the port register of the output port 4.
Thus, for each bit included in the port register of output port 4, when the value of the bit is "1", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the high level, When the value of the bit = "0", the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the low level.

In step S37-5, a register recovery process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S37-6. In the register restoration process, the value of the register (the value of the register used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) restored in step S37-3 is restored.
In step S37-6, stack pointer recovery processing is executed, and a series of processing is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S30-9). In the stack pointer return process, the value of the stack pointer saved in step S37-1 (the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is returned.

Next, the switch management process of step S4-9 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-9, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether the on state of the gate switch 104 is detected, and when it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2 and the gate If it is determined that the on state of the switch 104 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a general drawing starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The routine drawing starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected or not, and when it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected (Yes), If it is determined that the on state of the special view 1 start port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, the special view 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special view 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether the on state of the special view 2 start port switch 102 is detected or not, and when it is determined that the on state of the special view 2 start port switch 102 is detected (Yes), If it proceeds to S5-6 and determines that the ON state of the special view 2 start port switch 102 is not detected (No), the series of processing ends and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S4-10) Do.
In step S5-6, the special view 2 starting ball detection process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). The special view 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

Next, the routine drawing starting ball detection process of step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a routine drawing start ball detection process.
When the ordinary drawing starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 14, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, a common drawing random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the common drawing random number acquisition process, the random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the common drawing reserve number counter is the upper limit value ("1" in this embodiment), and it is determined that the value of the common drawing reserve number counter is not the upper limit value. If (No), it proceeds to step S6-3 and if it is determined that the value of the common drawing reservation number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processing is ended and the next processing (step S5) is performed. Move to 3).
In step S6-3, the general drawing reserve number counter updating process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the common drawing reserve number counter updating process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the common drawing reserve number counter is newly set in the common drawing reserve number counter.
In step S6-4, the general-view random number storage process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the common drawing random number storage process, the hit random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the common drawing start information storage area of the RAM 230 as common drawing start information.

Next, the special view 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special view 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, special symbol identification value setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set. Further, “1” is added to the value of the external information start opening ball entry number counter.
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 1 pending number counter is set in the pending number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, special symbol random number acquisition processing is executed, a series of processing is ended, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special view 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special view 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 16, first, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, special symbol identification value setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, the special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. Further, “1” is added to the value of the external information start opening ball entry number counter.
In step S8-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 2 pending number counter is set in the pending number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, special symbol random number acquisition processing is executed, a series of processing is ended, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S4-10). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, special symbol random number acquisition processing in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing special symbol random number acquisition processing.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 17, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, special symbol identification value acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, the special figure reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure reserve number acquisition process, the value (special figure 1 reserve) of the special figure reserve number counter (special figure 1 reserve number counter or special figure 2 reserve number counter) specified by the address set in the reserve number counter address area Get (load) the number or the special figure 2 pending number).
In step S9-3, the special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition processing, various random numbers (random number values) such as a big hit random number, a per symbol random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the special drawing reservation number (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is the upper limit (Yes), a series of processing To the next process (step S4-10 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, the special figure reservation number counter updating process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure holding number counter update process, the value set in the special figure holding number counter (the special figure 1 holding number counter or the special figure 2 holding number counter) specified by the address set in the holding number counter address area The value obtained by adding “1” to “1” is newly set in the special drawing suspension number counter.

In step S9-6, the special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, the special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start) of RAM 230 as various figure random numbers acquired in step S9-3 as special figure start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information). It stores in the information storage area or the special figure 2 start information storage area).
Specifically, the RAM 230 is a variable start information storage area in which start information during execution of notification display of a special symbol is stored, and a special figure 1 in which special view 1 start information for which start determination is suspended is stored. A start information storage area and a special view 2 start information storage area in which start determination is suspended are configured.
The special view 1 start information storage area is configured to include a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the special view 1 start information. Different priorities are defined in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper order → lower order) in the descending order of priority. . Then, as for the special view 1 start information stored in the special view 1 start information storage area, start determination is executed in order from the special view 1 start information stored in the storage unit of higher priority.
The special view 2 start information storage area is configured to include a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the special view 2 start information. Different priorities are defined in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper order → lower order) in the descending order of priority. . Then, for the special view 2 start information stored in the special view 2 start information storage area, the start determination is executed in order from the special view 2 start information stored in the storage unit of higher priority.
And, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 as the special figure 1 start information 1) Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the highest priority storage unit among the free storage units. Specifically, in the case where the value of the current special drawing 1 hold number counter is “1”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, when the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter = "2" at present, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 1 reservation number counter = "3", the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 1 reservation number counter is “4”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are selected as special drawing 2 start information. 2) Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the highest priority storage unit among the free storage units. Specifically, when the current value of the special drawing 2 reserve number counter is “1”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, when the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter = "2" at present, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter is “3”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 2 reserve number counter is “4”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.

  In step S9-7, a pending number specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the number-of-holds specification command setting process, the number-of-holds specification command specifying that the number of special views hold (number of special views 1 hold or special view 2 hold) increases by 1 is stored in subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 Do. Under the present circumstances, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the 1st special symbol lottery, the number-of-holds designation command which designates that the number of special figure 1 reservations has increased "1". Is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if it is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the special number 2 reservation number designating command which designates that the number of pending numbers has increased by one, Store in the subcommand output request buffer of

In step S9-8, a predetermination process is performed, a series of processes are complete | finished, and it transfers to the following process (step S4-10 or S5-5). In the prior determination process, the start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area) in step S9-6. (2) Start information Based on (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined start information"), various lottery results are determined in advance.
In the present embodiment, preliminary determination of various lottery results is executed for all start information (special view 1 start information and special view 2 start information).
The start information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state may not be pre-determined for various lottery results. Also, with regard to the special figure 2 start information acquired (stored) during stoppage of time saving control, prior determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 start information acquired (stored) during execution of time saving control As for the above, it does not matter as a configuration in which the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not performed.

In the pre-judging process, first, the pre-special-image crash judgment process is executed.
In the special special feature prize judgment processing, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit" or "disapproval") is judged (the prior special figure prize judgment).
The ROM 220 stores a special-designed lottery lottery table in which the big hit value of the special symbol lottery is registered. In addition, it corresponds to each of the combination of the setting value ("1"-"6") and the gaming state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state") as a special figure prize lottery table. A special-designed lottery lottery table is stored.
Specifically, as the special feature loss lottery table, "the set value 1 low probability special figure loss lottery table", "the set value 1 high probability special feature loss lottery table", and "the set value 2 low probability time special Figure selection lottery table "," Set value 2 high probability special figure selection lottery table "," Set value 3 low probability special figure selection lottery table "," Set value 3 high probability special figure selection lottery table " , "Set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "Set value There are stored 5 high probability special figure critical lottery tables, "set value 6 low probability special symbol critical lottery tables", and "set value 6 high probability special symbol lucky lottery tables".

In the “Set value 1 low probability special figure drop lottery table”, “0” is set in the set value = “1” and the special figure high probability state flag region (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Is selected). And in "the setting value 1 low certainty special figure loss lottery table", "0"-"204" are registered as a big hit value among big hit random numbers "0"-"65535".
In the “set value 1 high probability special figure critical lottery table”, the set value is “1”, and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag region (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Is selected). Then, in the “set value 1 high probability special figure loss lottery table”, “0” to “2039” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit value.
In the “Set value 2 low probability special figure drop lottery table”, “0” is set in the set value = “2” and the special figure high probability state flag region (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Is selected). And in "the setting value 2 low certainty special figure loss lottery table", "0"-"209" are registered as a big hit value among big hit random numbers "0"-"65535".
In the “set value 2 high probability special figure critical lottery table”, the set value is “2”, and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag region (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Is selected). Then, in the “set value 2 high probability special figure loss lottery table”, “0” to “2089” out of the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit value.
In the “Set value 3 low probability special figure critical lottery table”, “0” is set in the special value high probability state flag area with the set value = “3” (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Is selected). And in "the setting value 3 low certainty special figure loss lottery table", "0"-"214" are registered as a big hit value among big hit random numbers "0"-"65535".
In the “set value 3 high probability special figure critical lottery table”, the set value is “3”, and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag region (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Is selected). And in "the setting value 3 high probability special figure loss lottery table", "0"-"2139" among the big hit random numbers "0"-"65535" are registered as a big hit value.
In the “Set value 4 low probability special figure critical lottery table”, “0” is set in the special value high probability state flag area with the set value = “4” (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Is selected). And in "the setting value 4 low certainty special figure loss lottery table", "0"-"219" are registered as a big hit value among big hit random numbers "0"-"65535".
In the “set value 4 high probability special figure critical lottery table”, the set value is “4”, and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag region (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Is selected). Then, in the “set value 4 high probability special figure loss lottery table”, “0” to “2189” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit value.
In the "set value 5 low probability special figure critical lottery table", the set value = "5", and "0" in the special figure high probability state flag area is set (occurrence of "special figure low probability state" Is selected). And in "the setting value 5 low certainty special figure loss lottery table", "0"-"224" are registered as a big hit value among big hit random numbers "0"-"65535".
In the “set value 5 high probability special figure critical lottery table”, the set value is “5”, and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag region (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Is selected). Then, in the “set value 5 high probability special figure loss lottery table”, “0” to “2239” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit value.
In the “Set value 6 low probability special figure loss lottery table”, “0” is set in the special value high probability state flag area with the set value = “6” (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Is selected). And in "the setting value 5 low certainty special figure loss lottery table", "0"-"229" are registered as a big hit value among big hit random numbers "0"-"65535".
In the "set value 6 high probability special figure critical lottery table", the set value = "6", and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag region (occurrence of the "special figure high probability state" Is selected). Then, in the “set value 6 high probability special figure loss lottery table”, “0” to “2289” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit value.

In advance special feature critical judgment processing, check the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area and the current gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state") Read out the special-designed lottery lottery table corresponding to the check result.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read special symbol lottery symbol table read out, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit" (prior to special symbol lottery judgment). .
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special feature lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit". Determined as (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special feature lottery lottery table (when it matches the gap value), the special symbol The result of the lottery is determined to be "off" (dropout).

In the prior determination process, next, advance special figure stop symbol determination is executed. In the prior special figure stop symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (the prior special figure stop symbol determination).
In the prior special figure stop symbol determination processing, when it is determined that the "big hit" (winning) is made by the prior special figure presence determination, the type of the "big hit symbol" is determined (the prior special figure stop symbol determination).
Specifically, when the advance determination start information is the special view 1 start information, first, the value (set value) stored in the setting information storage area is confirmed, and the first corresponding to the confirmation result Read the jackpot symbol lottery table. Then, the type of the big hit symbol is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read first big hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the prior determination start information is the special view 2 start information, first, the value (set value) stored in the setting information storage area is confirmed, and the second big hit symbol lottery corresponding to the confirmation result Read the table Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read second jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the prior special figure stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "disapproval" (dropping) by the prior special figure presence determination, the "disappeared symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (the prior special figure stop symbol determination ).

In the predetermination process, next, a first pre-reading designated command setting process is executed.
In the first pre-reading specification command setting process, the first pre-reading specification command specifying the type of the stop symbol determined by the prior special drawing stop symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the prior determination process, next, it is determined whether or not the "special hit" determination as a "big hit" (winning) is determined in advance.
Then, when it is determined that the "special hit" is determined as "big hit" (winning), the special feature variation mode determining process at the time of winning is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the "special move" is determined to be "disapproval" (dropping) by the advance special figure hit judgment, the special selection process at the time of failure is executed.

In the winning special advance symbol figure variation mode determination process, first, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined (jump prior variation mode determination).
The ROM 220 stores a win-time variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variation mode type (variation mode number) is registered.
In addition, as a winning time fluctuation mode determination table, the type of big hit symbol ("big hit 1 symbol" ~ "big hit 6 symbol"), the gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", time-saving counter A winning time fluctuation mode determination table is stored corresponding to the combination of the value of.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the type of fluctuation mode (fluctuation mode number), “pseudo continuous no fluctuation”, “pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo continuous 3 fluctuation” and “pseudo continuous 4 fluctuation” Is defined.
Further, as the fluctuation mode (variation pattern number) belonging to the “pseudo-series no fluctuation”, a plurality of fluctuation modes (variation pattern numbers) in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are defined.
The degree of expectation of each type is, from the highest degree of expectation, to the type belonging to “pseudo reunion 4 fluctuation”, “pseudo reciprocation 3 fluctuation”, “pse It is defined that the degree of expectation is low.
"Expected degree" refers to the possibility (degree) that a big hit gaming state will occur when the type of the variation mode is selected.
Then, in each winning time fluctuation mode determination table, “pseudo reed 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo reed 3 fluctuation”, and “pseudo reed 4 fluctuation” are registered as the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number). (“Pseudo run no change” is not registered).

In the preliminary variation mode determination at the time of winning, first, the type of the big hit symbol determined by the prior special pattern stop symbol determination, the gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", the value of the time reduction counter, etc. , And are read out, and the win time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the advance determination start information and the read out win time fluctuation mode determination table.

In the advance special figure fluctuation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, a second prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the second prefetch designation command setting process, the second prefetch designation command for designating the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode determined by the win-time preliminary variation mode determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (jump prior variation pattern determination) in the prior special view variation mode determination process at the time of winning.
The ROM 220 stores a winning-time variation pattern determination table in which correspondences between variation pattern random numbers and types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) are registered.
In addition, the type of jackpot symbol ("big hit 1 symbol" ~ "big hit 6 symbol"), gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", the value of the time reduction counter, etc.), fluctuation mode The winning time fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the combination of the type of and is stored.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, “reach no change”, “normal reach change”, and “super reach change” are defined as the change pattern type (change pattern number).
Further, as the variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to the “no reach variation”, a plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) in which different variation times are associated with each other are defined.
Further, as fluctuation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to the “normal reach fluctuation”, a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation pattern numbers) to which mutually different fluctuation times are associated are defined.
Further, as the variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to the "super reach variation", a plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) in which different variation times are associated with each other are defined.
In the present embodiment, “super reach fluctuation 1”, “super reach fluctuation 2”, “super reach fluctuation 3”, and “super reach fluctuation 4” as fluctuation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “super reach fluctuation”. And “Super reach fluctuation 5” are defined.
The degree of expectation of each type is specified to be “super reach fluctuation”, “normal reach fluctuation”, and “no reach fluctuation” (high expectation to low expectation) in descending order of expectation.
In addition, the degree of expectation of each change pattern belonging to “super reach change” is “super reach change 5”, “super reach change 4”, “super reach change 3”, “super reach change” in descending order of expectation. 2) and “Super reach fluctuation 1” (high expectation degree → low expectation degree).
"Expected degree" refers to the possibility (degree) that a big hit gaming state will be generated when the type of the fluctuation pattern is selected.
Then, in each winning time fluctuation pattern determination table, “normal reach fluctuation” and “super reach fluctuation” are registered as the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) (“no reach fluctuation” is registered) Not).

In the preliminary variation pattern determination at the time of winning, first, the type of the big hit symbol determined by the prior special pattern stop symbol determination, the gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", the value of the time reduction counter, etc. ) And the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) determined by the winning pre-variation mode determination, and the winning fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the advance determination start information and the read out win time fluctuation pattern determination table.

In the advance special figure fluctuation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, a third prefetch specification command setting process is executed.
In the third prefetch designation command setting process, the third prefetch designation command for designating the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern determined by the winning pre-variation pattern determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

On the other hand, in the final election special figure fluctuation mode determination process, first, the type ("indefinite value" or "fixed value") of reach group random numbers included in the preliminary determination start information is determined (pre-random number type determination).
In the present embodiment, “indefinite value” and “fixed value” are defined as the reach group random number types.
With "undefined value", at the time of acquisition (storage) of start information (Special figure 1 start information or Special figure 2 start information), the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined Not, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the start information (at the time of execution of step S11-7), based on the number of reservations at that time (number of special figures 1 or number of special figures 2), etc. The type of the mode (the variation mode number) and the type of the variation pattern (the variation pattern number) are determined.
With "fixed value", regardless of the number of reservations etc. at the start of variable display of special symbols (during execution of step S11-7), acquisition of start information (special figure 1 start information or special view 2 start information) ( At the time of storage (at the time of execution of step S9-8), the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined.
In the present embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated in the range of “0” to “10006”. Then, among "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are set as "undefined value", and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed value".
Therefore, in the prior random number type determination, when the value of the reach group random number included in the prior determination start information is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value" and the reach group random number included in the prior determination start information If the value is “8500” or more, it is determined as “fixed value”.

In the final election special figure fluctuation mode determination process, when it is determined as a “fixed value” by the preliminary random number type determination, the preliminary reach group determination and the final election change mode determination are further executed.
On the other hand, in the final election special figure fluctuation mode determination process, when it is determined as the “indefinite value” by the preliminary random number type determination, the preliminary reach group determination and the preliminary selection fluctuation mode determination are not executed.
In advance reach group determination, the type of reach group (reach group number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between reach mode random numbers and reach group types (reach group numbers) is registered.
Further, as the reach group determination table, an indeterminate value reach group determination table and a fixed value reach group determination table are stored.
In the present embodiment, “reach group 1”, “reach group 2”, and “reach group 3” are defined as reach group types.
Then, only “reach group 1” is registered as the reach group type in the indefinite value reach group determination table (“reach group 2” and “reach group 3” are not registered).
On the other hand, in the fixed value reach group determination table, only “reach group 2” and “reach group 3” are registered as reach group types (“reach group 1” is not registered).
As described above, the advance reach group determination is performed only when it is determined as the “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination.
In advance reach group determination, the fixed value reach group determination table is read out. Then, the type of reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read out fixed value reach group determination table.

In the failure pre-variation mode determination, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined.
In the ROM 220, a winning selection variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variation mode type (variation mode number) is registered is stored.
In addition, as a failure time variation mode determination table, a “fall time variation mode determination table 1” corresponding to “reach group 1”, a “failure time variation mode determination table 2” corresponding to “reach group 2”, and “reach A "decision-of-selection variation mode determination table 3" corresponding to the group 3 "is stored.
Furthermore, it corresponds to each of the combination of the number of reservations (number of special figure 1 reservations or special figure 2 reservations) and the execution situation (during execution or stop) of time saving control as “falling chance fluctuation mode judgment table 1”. “Fail-off time variation mode determination table 1” to be stored is stored.

Then, only “pseudo run no run” is registered as “run mode change mode determination table 1” as a run mode type (run mode number) (“run 2 run”, “run 3 run” And “pseudo reunion 4 fluctuation” are not registered).
Also, as the number of reservations increases, the type of the fluctuation mode associated with a short fluctuation time (variation mode number) is selected, and the content of the “falling fluctuation mode determination table 1” corresponding to each number of reservations is set. There is.
In the "decision time fluctuation mode determination table 2", "pseudo reed 2 fluctuation", "pseudo reed 3 fluctuation", and "pseudo reed 4 fluctuation" are registered as the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number). (“Pseudo run no change” is not registered).
In the “decision-based fluctuation mode determination table 3”, “pseudo-run 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo-run 3 fluctuation”, and “pseudo-run 4 fluctuation” are registered as the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number). (“Pseudo run no change” is not registered).

As described above, the failure pre-variation mode determination is performed only when it is determined as the “fixed value” by the pre-random number type determination.
In the win-off preliminary fluctuation mode determination, first, the type of reach group determined by the preliminary reach group determination is confirmed, and the win-fall fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to the check result is read out.
Then, the type (variation mode number) of the fluctuation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read out failure time fluctuation mode determination table.

Next, the second pre-reading designated command setting process is executed in the pre-selection special-figure fluctuation mode determination process.
In the second pre-reading designated command setting process, when it is determined that “fixed value” is determined by the prior random number type determination, the second setting of the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined by the failure preselection variation mode determination The prefetch designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the prior random number type determination that the value is “indefinite value”, the second prefetch designation command specifying “indefinite value” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the on-off special-characteristic variation mode determination process, if on the basis of the on-off random number type determination that the “fixed value” is determined, the on-off selection advance variation pattern determination is further executed.
On the other hand, in the final election special figure fluctuation mode determination process, the preliminary random variation judgment at the time of final election is not executed when it is determined as the “indefinite value” by the preliminary random number type determination.
In the on-preselection variation pattern determination, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a winning selection variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the type of variation variation pattern (variation pattern number) is registered.
In addition, as a failure time variation pattern determination table, a “fall time variation pattern determination table 1” corresponding to “reach group 1”, a “failure time variation pattern determination table 2” corresponding to “reach group 2”, and “reach A "decision pattern determination table for at the time of a final selection" corresponding to the "group 3" is stored.
Furthermore, it corresponds to each of the combination of the number of reservations (number of special figures 1 number of reservations or number of special figures 2 number of reservations) and the execution situation (during execution or during suspension) of the number of reservations “Failure variation pattern determination table 1” to be stored is stored.

Then, only the "no reach change" is registered as the change pattern type (change pattern number) in the "decision change pattern determination table 1"("normal reach change" and "super reach change" are registered) Not).
Also, as the number of reservations increases, the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) associated with a shorter fluctuation time is selected, and the contents of the “falling fluctuation pattern determination table 1” corresponding to each number of reservations are set. There is.
Only "Normal reach fluctuation" is registered as a type (variation pattern number) of fluctuation patterns in "Failed run fluctuation pattern judgment table 2"("No reach fluctuation" and "Super reach fluctuation" are not registered. ).
Only "Super reach fluctuation" is registered as the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) in "Failed run fluctuation pattern determination table 3"("No reach fluctuation" and "Normal reach fluctuation" are not registered. ). Note that "Super Reach 5" is not registered in the "selection failure pattern determination table 3".

As described above, the on-off change predetermination pattern determination is performed only when it is determined to be “fixed value” by the pre-random number type determination.
In the pre-selection variation pattern determination, first, the type of reach group determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and the selection variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the advance determination start information and the read out win time fluctuation pattern determination table.

Next, the third pre-reading designated command setting process is executed in the pre-selection special figure fluctuation mode determination process.
In the third pre-reading specification command setting process, when it is determined that “fixed value” is determined by the prior random number type determination, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern determined by the preliminary variation pattern determination at failure is The prefetch designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the random number type determination has made the determination “indefinite value”, the third prefetch designation command specifying “indefinite value” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

As described above, when the value of the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination start information is “fixed value”, the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined, Second and third look-ahead designating commands for designating the type of the determined fluctuation mode and the type of the fluctuation pattern are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.
On the other hand, when the value of the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination start information is “indefinite value”, the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are not determined. , And the second and third pre-reading designation commands for designating "indefinite value" are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.

Next, the special game management process of step S4-11 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, as a phase / step (hereinafter referred to as “special game phase”) of a game (hereinafter referred to as “special game”) executed based on the special symbol lottery, “special figure fluctuation waiting state”, "Special figure fluctuating state", "special figure stop symbol display state", "big winning opening open state", "big winning opening open control state", "big winning opening closed effective state" and "big winning opening open" Seven of the weight states are defined.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven special game phases is set.
Further, in the ROM 220, as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) a special game, a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase is stored.
Then, in the special game management process, the special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-11, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the process proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, special game control module acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S10-1 (special game phase) is read out.
In step S10-3, special game control module execution processing is executed, and a series of processing is ended, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S4-12). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state", a special figure variation waiting process described later is started, and "the special figure variation state" If it is a value corresponding to, special processing during fluctuation processing to be described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to "special drawing stop symbol display state", processing during special processing stop described later is started, If it is a value corresponding to the "premature winning opening opening state", the later-described large winning opening opening pre-processing is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "big winning opening opening control state" When special winning opening opening control processing is started, when it is the value which corresponds to “big winning opening closing effective state”, the special winning opening closing effective processing which it mentions later is started, “big winning opening opening end wait state” If the value is the corresponding value, the special winning opening open end weight processing described later It is started.

Next, the special-image variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special figure change waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is “1” or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is not “1” or more (No) The process proceeds to step S11-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 suspension number counter is “1” or more (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more (Yes) In step S11-3, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is not “1” or more (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the next process (step S4-12) is performed. Move to).

In step S11-3, the special figure reservation number updating process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure holding number updating process, the special figure holding number (the special figure 1 holding number or the special figure 2 holding number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure reservation number updating process, first, the start information (special figure 1 start) stored in the start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area and special figure 2 start information storage area) of the RAM 230 One start information out of the information and the special view 2 start information) is selected as the determination start information.
In the present embodiment, regarding the special view 2 start information stored in the special view 2 start information storage area, the start determination is prioritized over the special view 1 start information stored in the special view 1 start information storage area. (A special figure crash determination, a special chart stop symbol decision, a special chart fluctuation pattern decision, etc.) are executed.
Therefore, when one or more special view 2 start information is stored in the special view 2 start information storage area, the earliest among the special view 2 start information stored in the special view 2 start information storage area What has been acquired (stored) is selected as the judgment start information. That is, the special view 2 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special view 2 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
On the other hand, when the special view 2 start information is not stored in the special view 2 start information storage area, the special view 1 start information stored in the special view 1 start information storage area is acquired first (stored ) Is selected as judgment start information. That is, the special view 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special view 1 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
Next, the value of the special figure holding number counter (the special figure 1 holding number counter or the special figure 2 holding number counter) is updated.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 start information is determined as the judgment start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly set for the special figure 1 hold number Set in the counter.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is determined as the judgment start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set in the special figure 2 hold number counter Do.
Next, the storage area of the determination start information is changed (shifted) from the start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area or special view 2 start information storage area) to the variable start information storage area.
Specifically, when the special view 2 start information is determined as the determination start information, the special view 2 start information (determination start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special view 2 start information storage area, The variable start information storage area is stored (shifted). When the special view 2 start information is stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the special view 2 start information storage area, the special view 2 start information stored in each storage unit is The storage unit is stored (shifted) in the storage unit one priority higher than the storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special view 1 start information is determined as the determination start information, the special view 1 start information (determination start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special view 1 start information storage area is changed during start Store (shift) in the information storage area. When the special view 1 start information is stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the special view 1 start information storage area, the special view 1 start information stored in each storage unit is The storage unit is stored (shifted) in the storage unit one priority higher than the storage unit.

In step S11-4, the special figure critical judgment processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special figure crash judgment process, the result of the special symbol lottery is judged (special figure crash judgment).
In the special figure success judgment process, check the value (set value) set in the setting information storage area and the current gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state"). , Read out the special figure lottery symbol table corresponding to the confirmation result.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the judgment start information and the read special symbol lottery lottery table, it is judged whether the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit" (judgement of a special symbol lottery).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special character draw lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” ( Determined to be won).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special character draw lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), the special symbol lottery The result of is judged to be "dropout" (dropout).

In step S11-5, special figure stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6.
In the special figure stop symbol determination process, first, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special figure stop symbol determination).
In other words, when it is determined that the "big hit" (winning) is made by the special feature drop determination, the type of the "big hit symbol" is determined.
Specifically, when the determination start information is the special view 1 start information, first, the value (set value) stored in the setting information storage area is confirmed, and the first big hit corresponding to the confirmation result Read out the symbol lottery table. Then, the type of the big hit symbol is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read first big hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the determination start information is the special view 2 start information, first, the value (set value) stored in the setting information storage area is confirmed, and the second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result Read out. Then, the type of the big hit symbol is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read second big hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the "special character crash judgment" is "disapproval" (dropping), the "disrupted symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol.

In the special figure stop symbol determination process, next, the stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, when it is determined that the "big hit" (winning) is determined by the special feature loss determination, first, the type of the determination start information (the special view 1 start information or the special view 2 start information) is confirmed. The at-win segment data table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read-out winning-time segment data table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special character is a dropout (dropout) by the judgment of the special drawing, the Seg data table at the time of election is read out. Then, the stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read-out failure-time segment data table.
In the special figure stop symbol determination process, next, the determined stop symbol (segment data, stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-6, symbol type designation command setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type designation command setting process, a symbol type designation command for designating the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-7, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, the fluctuation mode (the type of fluctuation mode and the type of fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, it is determined whether or not it is determined as the "big hit" (winning) by the special figure implosion determination. Then, if it is determined that the "big hit" (winning) has been determined by the special feature crash determination, the winning special pattern variation mode determining process is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure is judged to be “off” (dropping) by the special figure crash judgment, the special view fluctuation state judgment process at the time of failure is executed.

In the winning special pattern variation mode determination process, first, the type of the variation mode (variation mode number) is determined (jump variation mode determination).
In the win time fluctuation mode determination, the type of big hit symbol determined by the special symbol stop symbol determination, and the gaming state (“special symbol high probability status” or “special symbol low probability status”, value of time-saving counter, etc.) After confirmation, the win-time variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type (variation mode number) of the fluctuation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read out win time fluctuation mode determination table.
In the winning special pattern variation mode determination process, next, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (jump variation pattern determination).
In the winning variation pattern determination, the type of big hit symbol determined by the special symbol stop symbol determination, the gaming state ("special symbol high probability state" or "special symbol low probability state", the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) The type of fluctuation mode determined by the time fluctuation mode determination (variation mode number) is confirmed, and the win time fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read out win time fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the failure-time special chart fluctuation mode determination process, first, the type ("undetermined value" or "fixed value") of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is determined (random number type determination).
In the random number type determination, when the value of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value", and the value of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is "8500" When it is above, it is determined as "fixed value".
Next, the type (reach group number) of the reach group is determined (reach group determination) in the selection process special view fluctuation mode determination process.
In reach group determination, when it is determined by the random number type determination to be “fixed value”, the fixed value reach group determination table is read out. Then, the type of reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read out fixed value reach group determination table.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the random number type determination that the value is “indefinite value”, the indeterminate value reach group determination table is read out. Then, the type of reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read out indeterminate value reach group determination table.
Next, the type of fluctuation mode (fluctuation mode number) is judged (judged fluctuation mode judgment) in the failure selection special view fluctuation mode determination processing.
In the win-off variation mode determination, when it is determined as the “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the reach group type determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the on-off variation mode determination corresponding to the confirmation result Read the table Then, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read out on selection failure variation mode determination table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the random number type is "indefinite value", the type of reach group determined by reach group determination, the number of reservations (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number), and time saving control The execution status (during execution or stop) of is checked to read out the win-win variation mode determination table corresponding to the check result. Then, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read out on selection failure variation mode determination table.
Next, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (determination of variation pattern at the time of failure) in the failure time special figure fluctuation mode determination process.
In the win-off variation pattern determination, when it is determined as the “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the reach group type determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the on-off variation pattern determination corresponding to the confirmation result Read the table Then, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read out on failure selection variation pattern determination table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the random number type is "indefinite value", the type of reach group determined by reach group determination, the number of reservations (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number), and time saving control The execution status (during execution or stop) of is checked, and the win-win variation pattern determination table corresponding to the check result is read. Then, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read out on failure selection variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-8, fluctuation pattern command setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the variation pattern command setting process, a variation mode designation command for specifying the type of variation mode (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a fluctuation pattern designation command for specifying the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-9, special figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special chart fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 1”) corresponding to the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Further, a fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Then, the total time of the acquired fluctuation time 1 and fluctuation time 2 is calculated. Then, the calculated total time is set to the special game timer.

In step S11-10, special figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special view variation display data setting process, data for controlling the variation display of the special view display device is set.
Specifically, in the special view fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special view display timer.
Next, when the determination start information is the special view 1 start information, predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the special view 1 display device. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special view 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is subjected to lighting control.
On the other hand, when the determination start information is the special view 2 start information, predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the special view 2 display device. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special view 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is subjected to lighting control.

In step S11-11, a pending number specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the number-of-holds specification command setting process, the number-of-holds specification commands specifying that the number of special views hold (number of special views 1 hold or number of special views 2 hold) is decreased is stored in subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 Do. At this time, if the determination start information is special figure 1 start information, the pending number specification command specifying that the special figure 1 pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230, If the determination start information is the special view 2 start information, the pending number designation command specifying that the special view 2 pending number has decreased by “1” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S11-12, special game phase update processing is executed, and a series of processing is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuating state" is set.

Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special figure changing process.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special view display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special view display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- If it is determined that the value of the special view display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S12-3, the special figure fluctuation display data update process is executed, and the series of processes are ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special figure fluctuation display data updating process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special view change display data updating process, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the segment data corresponding to the special view 1 display device is updated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the segment data corresponding to the special view 2 display device is updated.

In step S12-4, the special view stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special view stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special view display device is set.
Specifically, in the special view stop display data setting process, the stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is ended, the acquired segment data (or the segment data corresponding to the acquired stopped symbol number) is set as segment data corresponding to the special view 1 display device. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special view 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is subjected to lighting control (stop display).
On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is ended, the acquired segment data (or the segment data corresponding to the acquired stopped symbol number) is set as segment data corresponding to the special view 2 display device. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special view 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is subjected to lighting control (stop display).
In step S12-5, special processing stop time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special view stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop designation command setting process, the stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information fixed frequency counter.
In step S12-7, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "special figure stop symbol display state" is set.

Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the process of stopping the special view.
When the special figure stoppage process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the type of stop symbol is "big hit symbol", and when it is determined that the type of stop symbol is not "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-3. When it is determined that the type of stop symbol is "big hit symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not time reduction control is being performed, and if it is determined that time reduction control is being performed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4, and time reduction control is being performed. If it is determined that the condition is not (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, if "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined that time reduction control is being executed, and if "0" is set, execution of time reduction control is performed. It is determined that it is not inside.

In step S13-4, the time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time saving control management process, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is ended.
Specifically, in the time reduction control management process, first, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value of the time reduction counter is newly set as the value of the time reduction counter.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is “0” (Yes), “0” is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (time saving control is stopped). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0", the state where "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained (the state where time saving control is being performed is maintained). .
In step S13-5, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.
In step S13-6, a game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the gaming state update process, the gaming state is updated.
Specifically, in the gaming state update process, “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. Further, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-7, special electric power control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric symbol control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric symbol 53 a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric combination control table corresponding to each type of "big hit". And each special electric wave control table, the special winning opening closing effective time, the special winning opening closing time, the number of round games, the number of opening and closing switching corresponding to each round game, the control data corresponding to the opening and closing switching of each time Control data, control time data, etc. are defined.
In the special electronic control control data setting process, the special electronic control control table corresponding to the type of the "big hit" determined in step S11-5 is read, and the special electronic control control table read out is Set in the area.
Next, “0” is set to the special electric wave continuous action number counter.

In step S13-8, an opening time setting process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric symbol control table set in the special electric symbol control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-9, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening designating command setting process, an opening designating command for designating the type of the "big hit" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [sphere] in the present embodiment) is added to the value of the external information big hit counter.
In step S13-10, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "a state before the big winning opening opening" is set.

Next, the special winning opening opening pre-processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening pre-processing.
When the special winning opening opening pre-processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, the special electric utility continuous operation frequency counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special service continuous action frequency counter updating process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special service continuous action frequency counter is newly set in the special service continuous action frequency counter.
In step S14-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, the special electronic switched ON / OFF switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electronic switch on / off switching number setting process, referring to the special electronic terminal control table set in the special electronic connector control table area of the RAM 230, the switching on / off switching number corresponding to the value of the special electronic utility continuous operation number counter is read . Then, the number of switching operations read out is set in the special electronic switching controller switching number counter.
Next, “0” is set as the value of the special electronic combination winning number counter.
In step S14-5, the special electronic switched ON / OFF switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electronic combination switching processing will be described later.
In step S14-6, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "big winning opening open control state" is set.

Next, the special electronic combination switching process in steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special electronic combination switching processing.
When the special electric open / close switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electronic switch on / off switching counter is "0", and it is determined that the value on the special electronic switch on / off switching counter is not "0" (No) The process proceeds to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electronic switch on / off switching number counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is ended and the next process (step S14-6) Or shift to S16-4).
In step S15-2, the special electric power control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric utility control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric symbol 53 a in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric power control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the special electric power open / close switching number counter is referred to with reference to the special electric power control table set in the special electric power control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for specifying energization or de-energization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the special winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric symbol 53a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, special electric power control time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric power control time setting process, the control time to continue the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric utility control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the special electric motor on / off switching number counter is referred to with reference to the special electric commodity control table set in the special electric commodity control table area of the RAM 230. Read time Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer.
In step S15-4, the special electric switch opening / closing switching number counter update process is executed, and the series of processes are ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electronic switch on / off switching frequency counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special electronic on / off switching frequency counter is newly set in the special electronic on / off switching frequency counter.

Next, the special winning opening open control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening open control process.
When the special winning opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electronic switch on / off switching counter is "0", and it is determined that the value on the special electronic switch on / off switching counter is not "0" (No) The process proceeds to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electronic switch on / off switching number counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, the special electric vehicle open / close switching process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric circuit winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [ball] in the present embodiment), and the value of the special electronic wiring board winning number counter is predetermined If it is determined that the upper limit value of has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric circuit winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No) Ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, the special winning opening open control end processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special winning opening open control end processing, solenoid control data for designating a stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric symbol 53a is controlled to be closed.
In step S16-6, the special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special winning opening closing effective time setting process, with reference to the special electronic combination control table set in the special electronic lighting control table area of the RAM 230, a predetermined special winning opening closing effective time (interval time), the special game timer Set to
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "large winning opening closed effective state" is set.

Next, the special winning opening closing effective processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening closing effective processing.
When the special winning opening closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, first, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric utility continuous action frequency counter has reached a specified value, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric utility continuous action frequency counter has not reached a specified value (No In step S17-3, when it is determined that the value of the special electric utility continuous operation frequency counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, with reference to the special electronic control control table set in the special electronic commercial object control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special electronic commercial object control table is acquired as a specified value and determination is performed. .
In step S17-3, the special winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the special winning opening closing time setting process, a special winning opening closing time is set in the special gaming timer with reference to the special electronic control control table set in the special electronic control control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "a state before the big winning opening opening" is set.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric control control table set in the special electric terminal control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, the special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "big winning opening open end wait state" is set.

Next, the special winning opening open end weight processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening open end weight process.
When the special winning opening open end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, the gaming state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the gaming state setting process, the gaming state is set.
Specifically, in the gaming state setting process, the value of the special figure high probability state flag of the RAM 230 is set in accordance with the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol).
At this time, if the type of stop symbol is "big hit 1 symbol" or "big hit 3 symbols" to "big hit 5 symbols", "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, if the type of stop symbol is "big hit 2 symbol" or "big hit 6 symbol", "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined time reduction number (70 [times] in the present embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter. Further, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, in the previous big hit symbol flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the type of big hit symbol is set.
In step S18-3, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

Next, the normal game management process of step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing normal game management processing.
Here, in the present embodiment, as a phase / step (hereinafter referred to as an “ordinary game phase”) of a game (hereinafter referred to as an “ordinary game”) executed based on a normal symbol lottery, State "," general drawing fluctuating state "," general drawing stop symbol display state "," general drawing electric jack before opening state "," general drawing electric jack opening control state "," general drawing electric jack closing effective " Seven states are defined as "state" and "general drawing electric symbol release end weight state".
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
In addition, the normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase is stored in the ROM 220 as an ordinary game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-12, as shown in FIG. 27, first, the process proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, the normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (ordinary game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, the normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S19-1 (the normal game phase) is read out.
In step S19-3, the normal game control module execution processing is executed, the series of processing is ended, and the processing shifts to the next processing (step S4-13). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read out in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "general-use map change waiting state", a general-purpose chart fluctuation waiting process described later is started, and the "general-use map change state" If it is a value corresponding to 普, the general drawing variation processing described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the “general drawing stop symbol display state”, a general drawing suspension processing described later is started, When it is a value corresponding to "a state before opening an electric motor combination", a pre-opening process for an opening of an ordinary movement character described later is started, and when it is a value corresponding to "a state of opening control of an ordinary electric combination When the normal motor combination release control process described later is started and the value corresponds to the "normal motor combination closed state", the common motor combination closed effective process described later is started, and If it is a value corresponding to the "object release end wait state", Electric won game open end wait process is started.

Next, the common drawing change waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a common drawing change waiting process.
When the common drawing fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the process proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the common drawing reserve number counter is “1” or more, and when it is determined that the value of the common drawing reserve number counter is “1” or more (Yes) The process proceeds to step S20-2, and when it is determined that the value of the common drawing reserve number counter is not "1" or more (No), the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13) Do.
In step S20-2, the general drawing reserve number updating process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the common drawing reservation number updating process, the common drawing reservation number is updated.
Specifically, in the common drawing reserve number updating process, one start information among the common drawing start information stored in the common drawing start information storage area of the RAM 230 is selected as the judgment start information.
In the present embodiment, among the common drawing start information stored in the common drawing start information storage area, the common drawing start information acquired (stored) first is selected as the judgment start information.

In step S20-3, the common-model hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the common map win determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (a common map win determination).
In the ROM 220, a common drawing win lottery table in which a hit value of the normal symbol lottery is registered is stored. Further, as the popular drawing win lottery table, a common drawing win lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control, and a common drawing win lottery table corresponding to the stop of the time reduction control are stored.
The hit value is registered so that the winning probability is the first probability (1/99 in the present embodiment) in the common-drawing loss lottery table corresponding to the stop of the time saving control. On the other hand, the hit value is registered so that the second probability (in this embodiment, 1/1) in which the winning probability is higher than the first probability is obtained in the common drawing win lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control. ing.
Then, in the common drawing win determination processing, the common drawing win is based on the hit random number included in the judgment start information and the common drawing win lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (during execution or stopping) of the time saving control. Execute the judgment.
Specifically, when the value of the hit random number included in the determination start information matches the hit value, it is determined that the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number included in the determination start information does not match the hit value, it is determined that the result of the normal symbol lottery is “off” (falling).

In step S20-4, a common drawing stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the common pattern stop symbol determination process, the type (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol stop symbol is determined (common pattern stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the common drawing stop symbol determination process, when it is determined that the hit is a "hit" (winning) by the common drawing win determination, "per common drawing symbol" is selected as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) judge.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "off" (dropout) is determined by the common-pattern hit-drop determination, the "off-out symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined type (stop symbol number) of the stop symbol is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, a common drawing fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination process, the type (the fluctuation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is judged (the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is being stopped, the first type (2.0 in the present embodiment) is used as the common drawing fluctuation pattern type (the fluctuation pattern number). Determine the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of [s].
On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, a type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) as the type (variation pattern number) of the common drawing fluctuation pattern Determine

In step S20-6, a common drawing fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the common drawing fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (the fluctuation pattern number) of the common drawing fluctuation pattern determined in step S20-6 is acquired. Then, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a common drawing fluctuation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the common drawing fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the common drawing display device is set.
Specifically, in the common drawing fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the common drawing display timer.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the common view display device. As a result, the segment corresponding to the set segment data among the predetermined number of segments constituting the common view display device is controlled to light.
In step S20-8, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "general drawing fluctuation state" is set.

Next, the general drawing changing process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the processing during the general drawing fluctuation.
When the ordinary-pattern-changing process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the ordinary gaming timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the common view display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the common view display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- If it is determined that the value of the common drawing display timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S21-3, the common drawing fluctuation display data update process is executed, the series of processes are ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the common drawing fluctuation display data updating process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the common drawing display device is updated.
Specifically, in the common drawing variation display data updating process, segment data corresponding to the common drawing display device is updated.

In step S21-4, a normal drawing stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the common drawing stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the common drawing display device is set.
Specifically, in the common drawing stop display data setting process, the stop symbol (segment data) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired segment data (segment data relating to the stop symbol) is set as segment data corresponding to the common view display device. As a result, the segment corresponding to the set segment data among the predetermined number of segments constituting the common view display device is subjected to lighting control (stop display).
In step S21-5, a general drawing stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the common drawing stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "general drawing stop symbol display state" is set.

Next, the ordinary drawing stoppage process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the processing while the general drawing is stopped.
When the ordinary drawing stop processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the process proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal gaming timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is "a symbol in a common figure", and when it is determined that the stop symbol is not "a symbol in a common figure" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. If it is determined that the stop symbol is "a symbol per common drawing" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "general drawing variation waiting state" is set.
In step S22-4, a regular electric utility control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric power control control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the ordinary electric power combination 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a common electric utility control table corresponding to the execution state (during execution or stop) of the time saving control. Then, each ordinary electric utility control table includes a time before the opening of the ordinary electric company, an effective time for closing the ordinary electric company, an opening end wait time, a number of switching operations, control data corresponding to opening / closing switching of each time (solenoid control data, control time Data etc. are defined.
In the ordinary electric utility control data setting process, the ordinary electric utility control table corresponding to the execution status (during execution or stop) of the time saving control is read, and the read ordinary electric utility control table is stored in the ordinary electric utility control table area of the RAM 230. Set
Next, the number of switching operations is read out with reference to the common electric utility control table set in the normal electric utility control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the number of switching operations read out is set in the counter for switching the number of switching operations. In addition, “0” is set as the value of the common electric symbol winning number counter.

In step S22-5, a time setting process prior to the opening of the ordinary electronic combination is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the processing for setting the time before opening the common electric symbol, a predetermined time before the opening of the common electric symbol is set as the normal gaming timer with reference to the normal electric symbol control table set in the normal electric symbol control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "the state before the opening of the normal electric combination" is set.

Next, the processing for opening the ordinary electric jack combination performed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the processing for opening the ordinary motor-operated part.
When the ordinary motor-operated combination opening pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 31, the process first proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal gaming timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S23-2, the normal electronic combination switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The ordinary electronic combination switching processing will be described later.
In step S23-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal motorized product opening control state" is set.

Next, the ordinary electronic combination switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric combination open / close switching process.
When the ordinary electric service opening and closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electronic combination switching frequency counter is “0”, and it is determined that the value of the ordinary electronic combination switching frequency counter is not “0” (No) The process proceeds to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the regular electronic combination switching frequency counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processes is completed and the next process (step S23-3) is performed. Or shift to S25-4).
In step S24-2, the ordinary electric utility control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric utility control data setting process, control data is set to control the ordinary motor-operated part 52a in the open state or the closed state.
Specifically, in the ordinary electric utility control data setting process, a solenoid corresponding to the value of the ordinary electric utility open / close switching number counter is referred to with reference to the ordinary electric utility control table set in the ordinary electric utility control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for specifying energization or de-energization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the normal motor-operated accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal motor-operated accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, the normal electric power control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the ordinary electric utility control time setting process, control corresponding to the value of the ordinary electric utility open / close switching number counter is referred to with reference to the ordinary electric utility control table set in the ordinary electric utility control table area of the RAM 230. Read time Then, the control time read out is set to the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal electronic combination switching frequency counter updating process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the regular electronic part switching switching number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the normal electronic part switching switching number counter is newly set in the normal electronic part switching switching number counter.

Next, the normal motor-operated combination release control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric combination product release control process.
When the ordinary motor-operated combination release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 33, the process first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal gaming timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S 25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electronic combination switching frequency counter is “0”, and it is determined that the value of the ordinary electronic combination switching frequency counter is not “0” (No) The process proceeds to step S25-3, and when it is determined that the value of the common electric product switching switching number counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electronic combination switching processing (see FIG. 32) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the common electric symbol winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]), and the value of the ordinary electric symbol winning number counter is predetermined. If it is determined that the upper limit value of has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the regular electric circuit winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No) Ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-13).

In step S25-5, the normal electric power open control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric power open control end process, solenoid control data for designating the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normal motorized product 52a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S25-6, the ordinary electric power close timing setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electronic combination closing effective time setting process, a predetermined ordinary electronic combination closing effective time is set in the ordinary gaming timer with reference to the ordinary electric utility control table set in the ordinary electric utility control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal motorized combination closed effective state" is set.

Next, the normal electric-powered combination object closing effective processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the ordinary motor-operated part closing effective processing.
When the normal motor-operated combination closing effective processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, the processing first shifts to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal gaming timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S26-2, the release end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the ordinary gaming timer with reference to the ordinary electric connector control table set in the ordinary electric connector control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal motorized product open end wait state" is set.

Next, the processing of step S19-3 for carrying out the ordinary electric jack combination end completion weight will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an ordinary motor-operated product release end weight process.
When the ordinary electric power product open end weight process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, first, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the ordinary gaming timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal gaming timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S27-2, the normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to "general drawing variation waiting state" is set.

Next, the performance display device control process of step S4-19 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the performance display device control process is a process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-19, as shown in FIG. 36, the process proceeds to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, a stack pointer save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-2. In the stack pointer save process, the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the save area of the RAM.
In step S28-2, a register save process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the register save process, the value of the register used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the save area of the RAM.
In step S28-3, the ball number addition process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4.
In the sphere number addition process, the value stored in the out sphere number addition value storage area of the RAM 230 is added to the value of the out sphere number counter.
Next, the value stored in the payout amount addition value storage area of the RAM 230 is added to the value of the payout number counter.
In step S28-4, base ratio calculation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. The base ratio calculation process will be described later.

In step S28-5, performance display device display processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the performance display device display process, control data for displaying the base ratio is set in the performance display device 61.
Specifically, in the performance display device display processing, in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, the base ratio (the current base ratio of the current section) calculated in step S38-4, or step S38-2. Set the performance display data signal control data corresponding to the stored base ratio (final base ratio of the previous section).
Thereby, according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, the performance display device 61 displays the current base ratio of the current section or the final of the previous section. The base ratio is displayed.
At this time, in the performance display device 61, the current base ratio of the current section and the final base ratio of the previous section are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals. The performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the base ratio and the performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the final base ratio of the previous section are alternately set at predetermined time intervals.

In step S28-6, a register recovery process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S28-7. In the register restoration process, the value of the register (the value of the register used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) restored in step S28-2 is restored.
In step S28-7, the stack pointer return process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-20). In the stack pointer return process, the value of the stack pointer saved in step S28-1 (the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is returned.

Next, the base ratio calculation process of step S28-4 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing base ratio calculation processing.
The base ratio calculation process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the base ratio calculation process is a process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The base ratio calculation process is called during execution of the performance display device control process.
When called in step S28-4, the base ratio calculation process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, it is determined whether the value of the out ball number counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the out ball number counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the out ball number counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the present embodiment, the reference value = 60000 × n (n = integer). Here, “n” is a value indicating the current section, and “1” is set as an initial value.
In step S38-2, base ratio storage processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-3. In the base ratio storage process, the base ratio calculated in the previous base ratio calculation process (step S38-4) is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 as a final base ratio of the previous section. Further, the value of the number-of-payouts counter is reset (“0” is set as the value of the payout counter).
In step S38-3, reference value update processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4. In the reference value update process, “1” is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. This updates the reference value.
In step S38-4, a base ratio calculation process is performed, a series of processes are complete | finished, and it transfers to the following process (step S28-5). In the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the out ball number counter and the value of the payout number counter.

(Various effects performed in pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
First, the hold effect (hold display) performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The pachinko machine 1 targets each start information (Special figure 1 start information or Special view 2 start information) stored in the start information storage area (Special figure 1 start information storage area and Special figure 2 start information storage area) Hold effect is executed.
The hold effect is that a notification display (start determination) of a special symbol based on start information (hereinafter referred to as "hold effect target start information") targeted for the hold effect is held, or a hold effect It is an effect that indicates (informs) that the notification display of the special symbol based on the target start information is being executed.
In the holding effect, a holding symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target starting information is displayed in the holding symbol display areas b1 to b3.

Specifically, in the reserved symbol display area b2, four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special figure 1 start information storage area as a display position (display unit) where the reserved symbol h is displayed The display position corresponding to each of) is specified.
In addition, each of the four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special view 2 start information storage area is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 as a display position (display section) at which the reserved symbol h is displayed. The corresponding display position is defined.
And in holding production which makes special figure 1 starting information object holding production object starting information, holding design h corresponding to holding production object starting information is displayed in holding symbol display field b1 and b2.
That is, during the period when the hold effect target start information is stored in the special view 1 start information storage area (the first storage unit to the fourth memory unit) (after the hold effect target start information is acquired, the hold effect target start information In the pending symbol display area b2, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending presentation object start information is displayed during the period before execution of the start determination based on).
At this time, the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target starting information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) in which the holding effect target starting information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the holding effect target starting information is stored in the changing start information storage area (after the start determination based on the holding effect target starting information, the notification display of the special symbol based on the holding effect target starting information is ended ), A reserved symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target starting information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.
On the other hand, in the hold effect where the special view 2 start information is set as the hold effect target start information, a hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b3.
That is, during the period when the hold effect target start information is stored in the special view 2 start information storage area (the first storage unit to the fourth memory unit) (after the hold effect target start information is acquired, the hold effect target start information In the pending symbol display area b3, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending presentation object start information is displayed during the period before execution of the start determination based on).
At this time, the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target starting information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) in which the holding effect target starting information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the holding effect target starting information is stored in the changing start information storage area (after the start determination based on the holding effect target starting information, the notification display of the special symbol based on the holding effect target starting information is ended ), A reserved symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target starting information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.

For example, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as the special figure 1 start information in the third storage unit of the special view 1 start information storage area, and the hold effect for the special view 1 start information is In the case of being executed, in response to the start of the hold effect, the held symbol h corresponding to the held effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit of the held symbol display area b2.
Thereafter, in response to the storage area storing the staging effect target starting information being changed (shifted) from the third storage unit to the second storage unit, the display area of the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding presentation target starting information Is changed (shifted) from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit to the display position corresponding to the second storage unit.
In addition, in response to the storage area for storing the holding effect target starting information being changed (shifted) from the second storage unit to the first storage unit, the display area of the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target starting information Is changed (shifted) from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit to the display position corresponding to the first storage unit.
Furthermore, in response to the storage area for storing the pending presentation object start information being changed (shifted) from the special figure 1 startup information storage area (first storage unit) to the fluctuating start information storage area, the pending presentation object The display area of the holding symbol h corresponding to the start information is changed (shifted) from the holding symbol display area b2 (display position corresponding to the first storage unit) to the holding symbol display area b1.
Then, in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the holding effect target starting information, the display of the held symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target starting information in the held symbol display area b1 is ended, thereby ending the holding effect. Do.

In the present embodiment, a normal on-hold effect and a on-hold notice effect are defined as the types of on-hold effects.
The “normally held effect” is a type of the held effect that does not indicate the result of the prior determination (step S9-8) based on the held effect target start information.
In the present embodiment, “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “golden” are defined as the color (type) of the retention symbol h.
In the normal holding effect, a holding symbol h of “white” is displayed as the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target starting information. Then, in the normal on-hold effect, the color of the on-hold symbol h corresponding to the on-hold effect target starting information does not change with "white".
The normal holding effect is that holding effect target start information (special figure 1 start information or special view 2 start information) is stored in the start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area or special view 2 start information storage area) It is started according to and is ended according to the end of the notice display of the special symbol based on the holding effect object starting information.

"Pending notice effect" is a type of pre-reading notice effect to be described later. In other words, the on-hold notice effect is a type of on-hold effect that suggests the result of the prior determination (step S9-8) based on the on-hold effect object start information (start information corresponding to the pre-read object on-hold information).
In the present embodiment, the on-hold notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of the advance special drawing stop symbol determination based on the on-hold effect target start information (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol").
In addition, it does not matter as a structure which suggests the result (specifically, the possibility of being "super reach fluctuation") of the prior special drawing fluctuation pattern determination based on the holding rendering object starting information.
In the following description, the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target starting information set as the target of the holding preview effect is referred to as "notice target holding symbol hy".
In the on-hold notice effect, the color of the on-off notice object pending pattern hy changes. That is, in the on-hold notice effect, the color of the on-premise target holding pattern hy changes to any one of "blue", "green", "red" and "gold". Then, in the reserve announcement effect, the color of the announcement object reserve symbol hy, which finally changes, suggests the degree of expectation that the big hit gaming state will be generated based on the reserve effect object start information.
Here, the degree of expectation of each color of the hold symbol h (notice target hold symbol hy) is “gold”, “red”, “green”, “blue”, “white” (expected degree) in descending order of expectation. It is defined that high → low expectations).
That is, each color of reserved symbol h (notice target reserved symbol hy) is graded (ranked) in advance based on the degree of expectation. Under the present circumstances, the stage (order) of each color of reservation design h is "gold" (the 5th stage), "red" (the 4th stage), "green" (the 3rd stage) in an order from a thing with a high stage (order) , “Blue” (second stage), “white” (first stage) (step high → step low).
"Expected degree" refers to the possibility (degree) that a big hit gaming state will be generated when the color is selected as the final color of the hold symbol h (the notice target hold symbol hy).

In addition, when the holding advance notice effect is executed, the holding change trigger for one or more times and the holding change content corresponding to the holding change trigger for each time are set. Then, in the on-hold notice effect, in response to the arrival of the on-hold change trigger of each time, the color of the on-the-not notice target on-hold symbol hy changes in accordance with the on-hold change content corresponding to the on-hold change trigger.
The "hold change trigger" is a trigger for changing the color of the notice target hold symbol "hy". In addition, “pending change content” is a content in which the color of the notice object pending design hy changes.
In this embodiment, at the time of acquisition (at the time of storage) of pre-reading target holding information (starting presentation object start information) as holding change trigger, at the time of start of change production concerning preceding holding information to be described later At the start of the change effect according to the start information), at the start of the simulated change effect of each time included in the change effect according to the pre-read object hold information (especially at the start of the first pseudo change effect), the change concerning pre-read object hold information The end of the pseudo fluctuation production of each time included in the effect (in particular, the end of the second pseudo fluctuation production) is specified. Then, when the on-hold notice effect is executed, one or more on-hold change triggers are set out of the on-hold change triggers.
Specifically, when the type of the fluctuation mode indicated by the prefetch target hold information (hold effect target start information) is a type belonging to “pseudo continuous no change”, when the prefetch target hold information is acquired (when stored) At the start of the change effect according to the advance hold information (when a plurality of advance hold information is stored, the start time of the change effect according to each advance hold information) and the start of the change effect according to the prefetch target hold information From time and time, one or more hold change triggers are set.
On the other hand, when the type of fluctuation mode indicated by the prefetch target reserve information (hold effect target start information) is “pseudo ream 2 fluctuating”, “pseudo ream 3 fluctuating” or “pseudo ream 4 fluctuating”, the pre-reading object suspend information Acquisition time (at the time of storage), start time of the change effect concerning the advance hold information (when start of the change effect concerning each advance hold information when plural advance hold information are stored), and pre-reading target The start of the fluctuation effect according to the hold information and the start of the pseudo fluctuation effect of each time included in the fluctuation effect according to the pre-read object hold information, and the end of the pseudo fluctuation effect each time included in the change effect according to the pre-read object hold information From time and time, one or more hold change triggers are set.
In the present embodiment, the on-hold notice effect is executed only for the special figure 1 start information among the special figure 1 start information and the special figure 2 start information.
Then, the suspension notice effect is started before the fluctuation effect relating to the prefetch target suspension information (starting information corresponding to the prefetch target suspension information) is started. Specifically, the holding advance notice effect is started in response to the start of display of the notice object hold symbol hy (storage of the hold effect object start information), and of the fluctuation effect based on the start information corresponding to the notice object hold symbol hy It is terminated upon termination.

Next, the fluctuation presentation performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, during the execution of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the first fluctuation effect and the second fluctuation effect are continuously performed as the fluctuation effect.
In the present embodiment, an aspect corresponding to each of the variation modes (each variation mode number) is defined as the aspect of the first variation presentation (variation presentation number). Further, an aspect corresponding to each type (each variation pattern number) of the variation pattern is defined as the aspect (the variation presentation number) of the second variation effect.
In the following description, the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a1 is "left symbol", and the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a2 is "middle symbol". The first effect pattern z1 displayed in the first effect pattern display area a3 is referred to as "right pattern".

First, an aspect of the first variation effect corresponding to each of the variation modes will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the first change is made when “pseudo continuous change” (“pseudo continuous 2 change”, “pseudo continuous 3 change” or “pseudo continuous 4 change”) is selected (designated) as the type of change mode. As the effect, "pseudo continuous variation effect" is selected.
In this embodiment, “pseudo ream 2 fluctuation rendition” corresponding to “pseudo ream 2 fluctuation” and “pse simulated ream 3 fluctuation corresponding to“ pse The "representation" and the "pseudo reunion 4 variation rendition" corresponding to the "pseudo reunion 4 fluctuation" are defined.
The “pseudo continuous fluctuation effect” is an effect that the variable display of the first effect pattern z1 is pseudo-executed a plurality of times while the variable display of the special symbol is performed once. Specifically, the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect includes a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects.
In the present embodiment, the “simulated series 2 fluctuation presentation” is configured to include two pseudo fluctuation presentation. On the other hand, the "simulated reciprocation 3-variation effect" is configured to include three times of pseudo-variation effect. On the other hand, the "simulated reciprocity 4 fluctuation effect" is configured to include four pseudo fluctuation effect effects.
In the following description, among the pseudo fluctuation effects included in the pseudo continuous fluctuation production, the pseudo fluctuation production of the final round is referred to as “final pseudo fluctuation production”. Further, among the simulated fluctuation effects included in the simulated continuous fluctuation effects, the simulated fluctuation effects of each time except for the final simulated fluctuation effects are referred to as “half-time simulated fluctuation effects”.

The pseudo fluctuation production (midway pseudo fluctuation production and final pseudo fluctuation production) of each time is configured to include a normal fluctuation production, a normal reach fluctuation production, and a pseudo connected production.
The “normal change effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect pattern z1 is normally changed and displayed in the three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, in the normal variation effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are normally changed and displayed.
The “normal change display” refers to a display in which the type of the first effect pattern z1 displayed at the lottery result display position of the first effect pattern display area a1 to a3 is sequentially switched.
The “lottery result display position” refers to a position at which the first effect pattern z1 is stopped and displayed in the stop effect described later.
"Normal reach fluctuation effect" is displayed temporarily stop the first effect pattern z1 in two or more of the three first effect symbol display area a1 to a3, and is displayed temporarily stop in two or more regions The combination of the 1st production pattern z1 which is set says the display production used as the combination contained in "big hit design."
In the following description, in the normal reach variation production (or reduced reach variation production described later), the first production symbol z1 temporarily displayed in the combination included in the "big hit symbol", "the first to form the reach state It is said that the effect pattern z1.
Specifically, in the normal reach variation effect, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol. That is, in the normal reach change effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped, and the left symbol and the right symbol displayed temporarily are the same type. In addition, in the normal reach change effect, the middle symbol is usually displayed in a variable manner.
The "temporary stop display" is a state in which the first effect pattern z1 of one type is moved (swayed, rotated, etc.) in a predetermined mode at the lottery result display position of the first effect pattern display area a1 to a3. , A display that continues for a predetermined time.

The “simulated series effect” is an effect to ask whether or not the next simulated fluctuation effect is executed.
The “pseudo-series effect” is a type of pseudo-sequence effect which suggests whether the next pseudo fluctuation effect is to be executed depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuous continuation symbol is temporarily stopped.
The “pseudo continuous continuation symbol” is configured to include information (in the present embodiment, the character of “NEXT”) telling the execution of the next pseudo fluctuation effect.
In the present embodiment, as the “pseudo-series effect”, “pseudo-series continuous effect” and “pseudo-series end effect” are defined.
The “pseudo-series continuation effect” is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo fluctuation effect is to be performed after asking whether the next pseudo fluctuation effect is to be executed.
Specifically, in the "simulated continuous continuation effect", a simulated continuous continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo continuous continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect pattern z1 in the normal variation display. Then, in the "simulated continuous continuation effect", the simulated continuous continuation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. This suggests that the next pseudo fluctuation presentation is to be performed.
The “pseudo-series end effect” is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo fluctuation effect is not performed after asking whether the next pseudo fluctuation effect is performed.
Specifically, in the "simulated continuous ending effect", as in the simulated continuous continuation effect, a simulated continuous continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo continuous continuation symbol goes to the lottery result display position Move. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect pattern z1 in the normal variation display. Then, in the "simulated continuous ending effect", the simulated continuous continuation symbol passes the lottery result display position without being displayed as a temporary stop. This suggests that the next pseudo fluctuation presentation is not performed.

Specifically, in the middle of each turn pseudo fluctuation production, reach fluctuation production is executed after normal fluctuation production is executed according to the start. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are usually displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. And during execution of reach change production (during formation of reach state), false continuation continuation production is performed.
The midway simulated fluctuation presentation of each time is ended in response to the end of the simulated continuous continuous presentation. Then, in response to the end of the pseudo variation production on the way, the next pseudo variation production is started.
In the final simulation change presentation of each time, the reach change presentation is performed after the normal change presentation is performed according to the start. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are usually displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, during the execution of the reach change effect (during the formation of the reach state), the pseudo continuous end effect is performed.
The final pseudo fluctuation production of each time is ended in response to the end of the pseudo run end production. Then, in response to the end of the final pseudo fluctuation presentation, the second fluctuation presentation (normal reach fluctuation presentation or super reach fluctuation presentation) is started.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when “pseudo-connected no change” is selected (designated) as the type of the change mode, “pseudo-connected no change effect” is selected as the change effect.
In the present embodiment, an aspect corresponding to each type (each variation pattern number) of “pseudo run no variation” is defined as a mode (swing effect number) of “pseudo run no change presentation”.
The “pseudo-connected no change effect” usually includes change effect.
Specifically, in the “pseudo series no change presentation”, the “normal change presentation” is started according to the start. That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol is started.
Then, in the “pseudo-connected no change effect”, normal fluctuation display (“normal change effect”) of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol is continued until the end of the “pseudo-connected no change effect”.
Note that, in the pseudo-linkless fluctuation presentation, the pseudo fluctuation presentation (usually, the pseudo fluctuation presentation or the special pseudo fluctuation presentation) is not performed.

Next, an aspect of the second variation production corresponding to each type of variation pattern will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when “super reach fluctuation” is selected (designated) as the type of fluctuation pattern, “super reach fluctuation effect” is selected as the second fluctuation effect.
In the present embodiment, an aspect corresponding to each type (each variation pattern number) of “super reach variation” is defined as the “super reach variation effect” aspect (variation effect number).
Specifically, as a mode of "super reach change production", "super reach change production 1" corresponding to "super reach change 1" and "super reach change production 2" corresponding to "super reach change 2" , "Super reach fluctuation 3" corresponding to "Super reach fluctuation 3", "Super reach fluctuation 4" corresponding to "Super reach fluctuation 4", and "Super reach fluctuation" corresponding to "Super reach fluctuation 5" It is defined that the effect 5 is.
As a result, the degree of expectation of each aspect of “super reach change production” is “super reach change production 5”, “super reach change production 4”, “super reach change production 3”, “the super reach change production 5” in order from the one with the high degree of expectation. Super reach fluctuation production 2 "," super reach fluctuation production 1 "(expected degree high → expected degree low).

The "super reach change effect"("super reach change effect 1" to "super reach change effect 5") is configured to include reach change effect, reduced reach change effect, and development reach effect.
The “reduction reach variation effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect pattern z1 forming the reach state is displayed in a reduced size (provisional stop display). In particular, in the reduced reach change effect, only the first effect pattern z1 forming the reach state is displayed, and the display of the first effect pattern z1 not forming the reach state is omitted. Specifically, in the reduced reach variation display, the right symbol and the left symbol forming the reach state are temporarily stopped in the contracted state, and the middle symbol is not displayed.

"Development reach effect" is an effect in which the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. Development reach production is performed during reach change production.
In the present embodiment, “development reach effect 1” to “development reach effect 5” having different contents are defined as types of the development reach effect.
And in "super reach change production 1", "development reach production 1" is performed as development reach production. The “development reach effect 1” includes the display of the “development reach effect image 1” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 1” is an effect image by “character A”.
On the other hand, in "super reach change production 2", "development reach production 2" is executed as development reach production. The “development reach effect 2” is configured to include the display of the “development reach effect image 2” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 2” is an effect image by “character B”.
On the other hand, in "super reach change production 3", "development reach production 3" is executed as development reach production. The “development reach effect 3” is configured to include the display of the “development reach effect image 3” on the display screen 31a. The “development reach effect image 3” is an effect image by the “character C”.
On the other hand, in "super reach change production 4", "development reach production 4" is executed as development reach production. The “development reach effect 4” is configured to include the display of the “development reach effect image 4” on the display screen 31a. The “development reach effect image 4” is an effect image by “character D”.
On the other hand, in "super reach change production 5", "development reach production 5" is executed as development reach production. The “development reach effect 5” is configured to include the display of the “development reach effect image 5” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 5” is an effect image by “character E”.

Specifically, in the “super reach change effect 1” to “super reach change effect 5”, the reduced reach change effect is performed after the normal reach change effect is performed according to the start.
That is, the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach state are reduced from the state in which the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state, and the reduced left symbol is moved to the upper left end of the display screen 31a. The right symbol is moved to the upper right end of the display screen 31a, and the middle symbol disappears. At this time, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol which are stop-displayed in the stop effect relating to the predetermined stop effect number.
And in "Super reach change production 1"-"Super reach change production 5", "Development reach production"("Development reach production 1"-"Development reach production 5" during the period when the reduced reach fluctuation production is being executed. ") Is performed.
That is, "development reach effect" is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the reduction reach change effect. The "development reach effect" is ended in response to the passage of a predetermined time from the start.
"Super reach change production 1"-"super reach change production 5" are ended according to the end of "development reach production". And according to the end of "super reach change production 1"-"super reach change production 5", stop production is started.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when “normal reach fluctuation” is selected (designated) as the type of fluctuation pattern, “normal reach fluctuation effect” is selected as the second fluctuation effect.
In the present embodiment, an aspect corresponding to each type (each variation pattern number) of “normal reach variation” is defined as the aspect (variation effect number) of “normal reach variation effect”.
The "normal reach change effect" usually includes reach change effects.
Specifically, in the "normal reach change effect", the normal reach change effect is executed according to the start. That is, the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state. The normal reach change effect is ended in response to the passage of a predetermined time from the start.
The “normal reach fluctuation effect” is ended in response to the end of the normal reach fluctuation effect. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of the "normal reach change effect".
In addition, development reach production is not performed in normal reach change production.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when “reach no change” is selected (designated) as the type of change pattern, “reach no change effect” is selected as the second change effect.
In the present embodiment, an aspect corresponding to each type (each variation pattern number) of "no reach variation" is defined as the aspect (the variation effect number) of the "no reach variation effect".
The "no reach variation effect" usually includes a variation effect.
Specifically, in the "reach no change presentation", the "normal change presentation" is performed according to the start. That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol is started.
And in "no reach variation effect", normal variation display ("normal change effect") of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol is continued until the end of the "no reach variation effect". Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of the "reach no change effect".
In the no reach fluctuation presentation, the reach fluctuation presentation and the development reach presentation are not executed.

Next, the main notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the main advance notice effect is executed while the change effect is being executed.
The "main advance notice effect" is the effect to be executed during the fluctuation effect, and suggests the result of the start judgment (the special figure judgment of falling mark, the special figure stop symbol judgment, the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) according to the fluctuation effect. It has become an effect.
In the present embodiment, the main preview effect is performed during the first variation effect. Then, the main preview effect suggests the result of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination (specifically, the type of the fluctuation pattern may be “super reach fluctuation”).
In the present embodiment, “Announcement notice” is defined as the type of main notice effect.

The "deep-cut advance notice" is a mode of the second change effect (specifically, the possibility that the second change effect mode is "super reach change effect" depending on the effect mode (contents of the dread-down notice image described later) Suggest the degree of expectation).
The gosling advance notice is configured to include the display of the go ahead cutting notice image on the display screen 31a. The foreboding cutting notice image is an effect image in which the screen is cut and a predetermined character appears.
In the present embodiment, “Screw notice 1” to “Screw notice 5” are defined as the type (aspect) of the notice.
In the "Shinshiri advance notice 1", "Sakaishinri notice image 1" is displayed as a snare cutting advance notice image. In the first notice image 1, the screen is torn up and the characters "chance !?" are displayed.
In the "Shinshiri Notice 2", "Sakairin notice image 2" is displayed as a shoring notice image. In the second notice image 2, the screen is torn up, and the characters "big chance !?" are displayed.
In "辻 3", "辻 3" is displayed as a preview image. In the warning notice image 3, the screen is torn apart, and the characters "excessive heat !?" are displayed.
In "辻 予 告 notice 4", "辻 予 告 notice image 4" is displayed as a 辻 予 告 notice image. The screen is cut off in the warning notice image 4 and the characters "super heat !?" are displayed.
In "辻 5", "辻 5" is displayed as a preview image. In the foreboding advance notice image 5, the screen is torn up and the characters "Ran dance !!" are displayed.
The degree of expectation of the various types of notices of 辻 is, in descending order of expectation, 辻 辻 5 予 告 辻 予 告 予 告 」」 辻 予 告 予 告 3 」辻 辻 辻 予 告」 、 、 辻 辻 予 告 1 It is defined that high → low expectations).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the main preview effect indicates the set value.
That is, during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state", the probability that "striking notice intensity 1" to "striking notice intensity 5" are selected as the directing intensity of the presiding warning, as the set value is a higher value. Is high. As a result, during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”, the probability that the pre-emptive notice is executed is higher as the setting value is higher.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state", the set value is suggested according to the frequency at which the sharpening advance notice is executed.

Next, the sub-notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a sub-notice effect is performed while the change effect is being performed.
"Sub-notice effect" is the effect to be executed during the fluctuation effect, and suggests the result of the start judgment (special figure overrun judgment, special view stop symbol judgment, special view fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) concerning the fluctuation effect It has become an effect.
In the present embodiment, the sub preliminary announcement effect indicates the result of the Tokusatsu drop determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit").
In the present embodiment, “character advance notice” is defined as the type of sub-notice effect.

The "character advance notice" indicates the result (expected degree) of the special feature fall judgment according to the effect mode (content of the character notice image to be described later).
The character preview includes display of a character preview image on the display screen 31a.
In the present embodiment, "character preview 1" to "character preview 5" are defined as the type (mode) of the character preview.
In "character preview 1", "character preview image 1" is displayed as a character preview image. In the character preview image 1, "character A" is displayed.
In "character preview 2", "character preview image 2" is displayed as a character preview image. In the character preview image 2, "character B" is displayed.
In "character preview 3", "character preview image 3" is displayed as a character preview image. In the character preview image 3, "character C" is displayed.
In "character preview 4", "character preview image 4" is displayed as a character preview image. In the character preview image 4, "Character D" is displayed.
In "character preview 5", "character preview image 5" is displayed as a character preview image. In the character preview image 5, "character E" is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1 in particular, the setting value is suggested by the sub-announcement effect.
That is, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability that "character preview intensity 1" to "character preview intensity 5" are selected as the effect intensity of the character preview. As a result, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability that the character advance is performed.
Therefore, the set value is suggested according to the frequency at which the character preview is performed.
Also, "character advance notice 5" is selected only when the setting value = "5" or "6".
Thus, it is suggested that the setting value = “5” or “6” when “character advance notice 5” is executed as the sub advance notice effect.

(Process executed by the effect control circuit 300)
Next, processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
The effect control circuit 300 is provided with a reset circuit (not shown). The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts CPU initialization processing (not shown) in response to the generation of the reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the CPU initialization process is started, various registers, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, etc.), clock pulse oscillator, various RAMs, etc. are first initialized. Next, the effect random number updating process for updating various effect random numbers is executed. Thereafter, the effect random number updating process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes described later are executed.

Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to the reception of the control command from the main control circuit 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control circuit 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

Next, a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the sub timer interrupt process.
The effect control circuit 300 includes a clock pulse generation circuit. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts the sub timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 every predetermined cycle based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock pulse generation circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register save process, the value of the register is saved in the save area of the RAM.
In step S31-2, a timer update process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, various timers included in the effect control circuit 300 are updated.
In step S31-3, command analysis processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the reception buffer of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is analyzed, and a process according to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, time schedule management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. The time schedule management process manages the progress of each effect.
Here, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 corresponds to each effect (each aspect of the fluctuation effect, each aspect of the stop effect, each aspect of the advance effect, each aspect of the advance notice effect, each aspect of the hold effect, etc.) An effect control table is stored.
The “effect control table” is information defining the progression of effects (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, movable object effect, etc.).
A plurality of process data are registered in time series in each effect control table. Each process data includes one or more pieces of command information. Each command information is processing for specifying the start of a predetermined effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect or movable object effect). In particular, each command information includes information for specifying the content of the effect to be started (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number or movable object effect number).

In the time schedule management process, an effect control table corresponding to each effect set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, and an effect management timer corresponding to the effect (effect management timer for measuring the elapsed time of the effect The progress of the effect is managed based on the value of).
Specifically, for each effect, a process based on process data corresponding to the value of the current effect management timer among process data registered in the effect control table is executed. As a result, the command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

  In step S31-5, a register recovery process is performed, and the sub timer interrupt process is ended. In the register recovery process, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is recovered.

Next, the command analysis process of step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, as shown in FIG. 39, the process proceeds to step S32-1.
In step S32-1, the setting value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a subcommand specifying a setting value has been received. Then, when it is determined that the sub command specifying the setting value has been received, the setting value specified by the sub command is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S32-2, a game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the gaming state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, a pending command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The hold command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, the prefetch command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The prefetch command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, the variation command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The fluctuation command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, stop command reception processing is executed, and a series of processing is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S31-4). The stop command reception process will be described later.

Next, the hold command reception process of step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the hold command reception process.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, as shown in FIG. 40, the process proceeds to step S36-1.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not the hold count designation command has been received. If it is determined that the hold count designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2, and the hold count designation command is If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold count specification command specifies an increase in the hold count (that the hold count has increased by "1"), and the hold count specification command specifies an increase in the hold count. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and it is determined that the hold count specification command does not specify an increase in the hold count (specifies that the hold count has decreased by "1") If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, a pending number addition process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S36-4.
In the pending number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the pending number designation command designates an increase in the number of pending special views.
When it is determined that the number-of-holds specification command specifies an increase in the number of special views 1 hold, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special view 1 hold number counter is newly added. Set to the special figure 1 hold number counter. Further, the normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special drawing 1 start information is set.
For this, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which the specially acquired special figure 1 start information is stored among the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display area b2 as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h The display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit is set. Here, the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the specially acquired special drawing 1 start information is stored is determined based on the value of the special drawing 1 hold number counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the number-of-holds specification command specifies an increase in the number of held special views, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the number of held special views counter Set in the special figure 2 hold number counter. Further, the normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special view 2 start information is set.
For this, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which special view 2 start information newly acquired is stored among four display positions included in reserved symbol display region b3 as a display region for displaying reserved symbol h. The display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit is set. Here, the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the specially acquired special drawing 2 start information is stored is determined based on the value of the special drawing 2 hold number counter.

In step S36-4, the number-of-holds subtraction process is performed, a series of processes are ended, and it transfers to the following process (step S32-4).
In the number-of-holds subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the number-of-holds specification command designates subtraction of the number of special-order 1 reservations.
When it is determined that the number-of-holds specification command designates subtraction of the number of special-order 1 reservations, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special-order 1 number-of-holds counter is newly added. Set to the special figure 1 hold number counter. In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the holding effect corresponding to the holding symbol h displayed in the holding symbol display area b1 is ended. Thereby, the display of the holding symbol h corresponding to the ending holding effect is ended.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b2 (in the first storage unit The corresponding display position is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is selected from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit. 1 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is selected from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is determined from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number-of-holds specification command designates subtraction of the number of special views 2 hold, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special number 2 hold number counter is newly added. Set in the special figure 2 hold number counter. Further, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the holding effect corresponding to the holding symbol h displayed in the holding symbol display area b1 is ended. Thereby, the display of the holding symbol h corresponding to the ending holding effect is ended.
In addition, when the retention symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the retention symbol display region b3, the display position of the retention symbol h is displayed as the retention symbol display region b3 (in the first storage portion The corresponding display position is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is selected from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit. 1 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is determined from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is selected from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

Next, the prefetch command reception process of step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing.
When the prefetch command reception process is executed in step S32-4, as shown in FIG. 41, the process proceeds to step S33-1.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not the prefetch designation command (the first prefetch designation command, the second prefetch designation command, and the third prefetch designation command) is received, and it is determined that the prefetch designation command is received (Yes In step S33-2, if it is determined that the prefetch designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, the prefetch information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the pre-reading information analysis process, the information designated by the pre-reading specification command is stored as hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, a hold information storage area capable of storing the hold information is set. Also, as a pending information storage area, a first pending information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 start information storage area of RAM 230), and a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 start information storage area of RAM 230) And a second holding information storage area corresponding to.
The first hold information storage area is configured to include first to fourth storage units as storage units capable of storing the hold information. The first hold information storage area stores hold information corresponding to the special view 1 start information stored in the special view 1 start information storage area. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special view 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special view 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special view 1 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special view 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special view 1 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special view 1 start information storage area. The hold information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special view 1 start information stored in the fourth storage unit of the special view 1 start information storage area.
The second hold information storage area is configured to include first to fourth storage units as storage units capable of storing the hold information. The second hold information storage area stores hold information corresponding to the special view 2 start information stored in the special view 2 start information storage area. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special view 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special view 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special view 1 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special view 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special view 1 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special view 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special view 1 start information stored in the fourth storage unit of the special view 2 start information storage area.
Each hold information includes symbol information indicating the type of stop symbol, first variation information indicating the content of the variation mode ("variation mode number" or "undefined value"), and the content of the variation pattern ("variation pattern number" And second variation information indicating "uncertain value".

In the preread information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first preread designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first prefetch designation command (“discard symbol” or “big hit p symbol ), The contents of the fluctuation mode specified by the second prefetch specification command ("variation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the contents of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third prefetch specification command ("variation pattern n" or " Indeterminate value “)”, and the symbol information corresponding to the type of the stop symbol analyzed, the first variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation mode, and the second corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern Generating pending information including the change information; Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first prefetch designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first prefetch designation command (“discard symbol” or “big hit p symbol ), The contents of the fluctuation mode specified by the second prefetch specification command ("variation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the contents of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third prefetch specification command ("variation pattern n" or " Indeterminate value “)”, and the symbol information corresponding to the type of the stop symbol analyzed, the first variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation mode, and the second corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern Generating pending information including the change information; Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the second hold information storage area.
In the following description, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as "pre-reading target hold information". Further, among the hold information stored in the first hold information storage area, the hold information for which notification display (the variable display and the stop display) is executed earlier than the prefetch target hold information is referred to as “preceding hold information”.

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the prefetch advance notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the prefetch advance notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and the prefetch advance notice effect is If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (Step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, “1” is set in the pre-reading advance presentation in-progress flag area of the RAM of the presentation control circuit 300 during execution of the pre-reading advance presentation effect. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not preview advance notice effect is being executed, based on whether or not "1" is set in the prefetch notice advance effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. .
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-read advance notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-read advance notice effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5 and the pre-read advance notice effect execution condition If it is determined that the condition (4) is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, (1) that the pre-reading target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special view 1 start information, (2) the advance hold information of a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, "2") or more is stored. (3) there is no advance hold information indicating the type (fluctuation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach fluctuation" or "super reach fluctuation" as the type of fluctuation pattern, and (4) stop of time reduction control If all conditions of (5) that the jackpot gaming state is not occurring are satisfied, it is determined that the prefetch notice effect execution execution condition is satisfied.
In addition, it is possible to change suitably the content of the advance notice generation effect execution condition. That is, when not one of the above conditions (1) to (5) but one or more of the above (1) to (5) is satisfied, it is determined that the prefetch advance notice execution condition is satisfied. I don't care. Moreover, other conditions different from the conditions of said (1)-(5) may be included as pre-reading advance presentation production execution conditions.

In step S33-5, the prefetch notice generation lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading notice effect lottery process, the pre-reading notice effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which a hit value of the pre-reading notice effect drawing is registered.
In the pre-reading notice effect lottery process, first, the pre-reading notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute preview advance notice effect based on the prefetched advance notice effect lottery random number acquired and the advance notice advance effect lottery table.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the prefetch advance notice effect lottery performed in step S33-5 is won, and if it is determined that the prefetch advance notice effect lottery is won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that the process proceeds and it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery is not selected (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-7, the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes are ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the preview advance notice effect setting process, the contents of the advance notice notice effect (pending notice effect) are set.
Specifically, in the preview advance notice effect setting process, first, a hold notice effect strength setting process is executed. In the on-hold notice effect level setting process, the on-off notice effect level is set.
In the present embodiment, “pending notice strength 1”, “pending notice strength 2”, “pending notice strength 3”, and “pending notice strength 4” are defined as the production strength of the pending notice effect. .
And the degree of expectation of each production intensity is, from the one with the highest degree of expectation, "Hold notice strength 4", "Hold notice strength 3", "Hold notice strength 2", "Hold notice strength 1" (expected high → It is defined that the degree of expectation is low.
On-hold notice effect strength lottery table in which correspondence of effect strength lottery random numbers and on-off notice effect strength ("On-off notice strength 4" to "On-off notice strength 1") is registered in ROM of the effect control circuit 300 Is stored.
Further, as the suspension notice effect strength lottery table, a suspension notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to each combination of the type of fluctuation mode, the type of fluctuation pattern, and the type of stop symbol is stored.
In the on-hold notice effect intensity setting process, first, an effect intensity lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of fluctuation mode indicated by preread target hold information, the type of change pattern indicated by preread target hold information, and the type of stop symbol indicated by preread target hold information are confirmed, and the hold corresponding to the confirmation result Read out the preliminary effect intensity lottery table. Then, based on the acquired effect intensity lottery random number and the read on-hold notice effect intensity lottery table, the effect intensity of the on-hold notice effect is determined (determined).
In the pre-read advance notice effect setting process, when the effect intensity of the on-hold notice effect is determined, next, the process proceeds to the final color setting process.

In the final color setting process, the final color is set.
In the following description, the hold symbol h corresponding to the pre-reading target hold information is referred to as "pre-reading target hold symbol".
The "final color" refers to the color of the pre-reading target holding symbol that is finally changed in the holding preview effect.
In the present embodiment, when “pending notice strength 4” is determined as the presentation strength of the pending notice effect, “gold” is determined (judged) as the final color.
On the other hand, when "pending notice strength 3" is determined as the production intensity of the pending notice effect, "red" is determined (judged) as the final color.
On the other hand, when "pending notice strength 2" is determined as the production intensity of the pending notice effect, "green" is determined (judged) as the final color.
On the other hand, when "pending notice strength 1" is determined as the presentation strength of the pending notice effect, "blue" is determined (judged) as the final color.
In the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process, when the final color is determined, next, the process shifts to a hold change trigger setting process.
Here, the setting value may be suggested depending on the mode of the on-hold notice effect.
Specifically, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a color according to the setting value may be selected as the final color.
That is, in addition to “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red” and “golden” as the color (type) of the reserved symbol h, a special color (for example, “rainbow”) is defined. Then, the final color is determined in consideration of the setting value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
For example, in the case where “hold notice strength 4” is determined as the production intensity of the hold notice effect and the setting value = “6” or “5” stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, As the final color, one of "gold" and "rainbow" is determined. At this time, one of "golden" and "rainbow" is determined by lottery.
In addition, when "pending notice strength 3"-"pending notice strength 1" are determined as production | presentation strength of pending | preceding preliminary production, "rainbow color" is not determined as a final color. In addition, when the setting values stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 are “4” to “1”, “rainbow color” is not determined as the final color.
By this, it is possible to suggest the set value by the mode (the color of the reserved symbol h) of the reserved advance presentation effect.

In the hold change trigger setting process, the hold change trigger is set.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a held change trigger lottery table in which the correspondence between the held change trigger lottery random number and the combination of the held change trigger is registered.
In addition, as the pending change trigger lottery table, the pending change trigger lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special figure 1 pending number (“3” or “4”), the type of fluctuation mode and the final color is stored. ing.
In the pending change trigger lottery table corresponding to the case where the type of fluctuation mode indicated by the prefetch target pending information is “pseudo continuous absence variation”, when the prefetch target pending information is acquired (when stored) as a combination of pending change timing, A combination including at least one hold change trigger is registered at the start of the change effect relating to the advance hold information of each time and the start time of the change effect relating to the pre-reading target hold information.
On the other hand, in the pending change trigger lottery table corresponding to the types of fluctuation modes indicated by the prefetch target pending information from “pseudo ream 2 fluctuating” to “pseudo ream 4 fluctuating”, the prefetching target pending as a combination of the pending change trigger At the time of acquisition of information (at the time of storage), at the time of start of the fluctuation effect according to the advance hold information of each time, at the start of the change effect concerning the pre-read object hold information, each time pseudo fluctuation effect included in the change effect concerning pre-read object hold information At the start of the combination, the combination including at least one suspension change trigger is registered among the termination times of the pseudo variation presentation each time included in the variation presentation relating to the pre-reading target suspension information.
In the hold change trigger setting process, first, the hold change trigger lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, check the number of special drawing 1 reservations, the type of change mode indicated by the prefetch target reservation information, and the final color determined in the final color setting process, and change the reservation change trigger lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result read out. Then, based on the acquired hold change trigger lottery random number and the read hold change trigger lottery table, a combination of the hold change trigger is determined (determined). Then, one or more hold change triggers associated with the hold notification effect are set in accordance with the combination of the hold change triggers determined.
In the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process, when the hold change trigger is set, next, the process shifts to a hold change contents setting process.

In the pending change content setting process, the pending change content corresponding to each pending change trigger is set.
Specifically, in the pending change content setting process, the color of the pre-reading target pending before the change and the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol after the change are set as the pending change content.
In the present embodiment, among the one or a plurality of suspension change triggers set in the suspension change trigger setting process, the suspension change triggers of each time are sequentially arranged from the suspension change opportunity (following suspension change opportunity) arriving later. The corresponding pending change is determined.
For example, when three pending change triggers are set in the pending change trigger setting process, the third (final) pending change trigger, the second pending change trigger, and the first pending change trigger are performed in this order. The pending change content corresponding to the pending change trigger of is determined.
Moreover, when determining the pending change content corresponding to the pending change trigger of each time, first, the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol after the change is determined, and then the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol before the change is determined Ru. At this time, a color having a lower degree of expectation is determined as the color of the pre-reading target holding symbol before the change as compared with the color of the pre-reading target holding symbol after the change. As a result, in response to the arrival of the hold change trigger of each time, the color of the pre-reading target hold symbol is changed (promoted) to a color with a high degree of expectation.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a pending change content lottery table in which the correspondence between the pending change content lottery random number and the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol before the change is registered.
Further, as the pending change content lottery table, a pending change content lottery table corresponding to each color of the pending symbol h (the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol after change) is stored.
Then, in the pending change content lottery table corresponding to each color of the pending symbol h (color of the pre-reading target pending symbol after change), the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol before the change is compared with the color of pre-reading target pending symbol after the change Then, only colors with low expectations are registered.
In the hold change content setting process, first, the hold change content is determined for the last hold change trigger among the hold change trigger set in the hold change trigger setting process. In order to do this, first, the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol after the change relating to the last held change trigger is determined. At this time, the final color determined in the final color setting process is determined as the color of the pre-reading target reserved symbol after the change relating to the final change in hold change trigger. Next, the color of the pre-reading object retention design before the change which relates to retention change opportunity of the last round is decided. For this, first, the pending change content lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the pending change content lottery table corresponding to the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol after the change determined for the last pending change trigger is read out. Then, based on the obtained hold change content lottery random number and the read hold change content lottery table, the color of the pre-reading target hold symbol before the change relating to the hold change trigger of the final round is determined.
In the hold change content setting process, next, the hold change content is determined for the hold change trigger of each time except the last hold change trigger among the hold change trigger set in the hold change trigger setting process. At this time, the pending change content corresponding to each pending change trigger is determined in order from the pending change trigger that arrives later.
In order to determine the pending change content corresponding to the pending change trigger of each time, first, the color of the prefetching target pending symbol after the change relating to the pending change trigger is determined. At this time, as the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol after the change relating to the current pending change trigger, the color of the pre-change target pending symbol before the change determined for the next pending change trigger is determined. Next, the color of the pre-reading object retention design before the change which relates to this retention change opportunity is decided. For this, first, the pending change content lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the pending change content lottery table corresponding to the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol after the change determined for the current pending change trigger is read out. Then, based on the acquired pending change content lottery random number and the retrieved pending change content lottery table, the color of the pre-reading target pending symbol before the change relating to the current pending change trigger is determined.
In the pending change content setting process, next, the pending change content determined for each pending change trigger is set in association with the pending change trigger. Thereby, in response to the arrival of the hold change trigger of each time, the color of the prefetch target hold symbol is changed (promoted) in accordance with the hold change content set for the hold change trigger.

Next, in the pre-reading notice effect setting process, “1” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag region of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
By the above, in response to the arrival of the first hold change trigger, the hold notice effect is started.
It should be noted that “0” is set in the pre-read advance notice effect flag region of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 according to the end of the hold notice effect by a process not shown.

Next, the variation command reception process of step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation command reception process.
When the fluctuation command reception process is executed in step S32-5, as shown in FIG. 42, the process proceeds to step S34-1.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, and the predetermined control command is output. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command refers to a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, the stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, the mode (stop effect number) of the stop effect is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the mode (stop effect number) of the stop effect is determined based on the type of the stop symbol designated by the symbol type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Here, the setting value may be suggested depending on the mode of the stop effect.
Specifically, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a mode according to the set value may be selected as the mode of the stop effect.
That is, as the mode (type) of the first effect pattern z1, a normal effect pattern and a special effect pattern are defined. Then, in consideration of the setting value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the mode of the first effect pattern z1 to be stopped and displayed in the stop effect is determined.
For example, when the setting value = "6" or "5" stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, a normal effect pattern and a special effect pattern are displayed as the effect pattern z1 displayed in the stop effect in the stop effect. Of the effect design, one aspect is determined. At this time, one of the normal effect symbol and the special effect symbol is determined by lottery.
In the case where the setting value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is “4” to “1”, the special effect symbol is displayed as an aspect of the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the stop effect in the stop effect. Can not be determined.
By this, it becomes possible to suggest a setting value by the aspect of the 1st presentation design z1 by which the stop display is carried out in the stop production.

In step S34-3, the fluctuation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the fluctuation presentation determination process, a mode (a fluctuation presentation number) of the fluctuation presentation is determined.
Specifically, in the variation production determination process, first, the first variation production determination process for determining the mode (the variation production number) of the first variation production is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a first change effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the change mode type (the change mode number) and the first change effect mode (the change effect number) is registered. .
In the first variation presentation determination process, first, the first variation presentation lottery table is read out. Then, among the aspects (variation effect numbers) of the first fluctuation effect registered in the first fluctuation effect lottery table, the first fluctuation effect corresponding to the type (variation mode number) of the fluctuation mode designated by the fluctuation mode designation command Determine (select) the aspect of

In the fluctuation presentation determination process, next, a second fluctuation presentation determination process for determining a mode (a fluctuation presentation number) of the second fluctuation presentation is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a second change effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the change pattern type (the change pattern number) and the second change effect mode (the change effect number) is registered. .
In the second variation presentation determination process, first, the second variation presentation lottery table is read out. The second variation effect corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command in the second variation effect aspect (variation effect number) registered in the second variation effect lottery table Determine (select) the aspect of

Next, in the fluctuation production determination process, “pseudo series fluctuation production” (“pseudo series 2 fluctuation production”, “pseudo series 3 fluctuation production” or “simulation series 4 fluctuation production” ") Is determined. Then, when it is determined that "simulated continuous fluctuation production" is determined as the mode (the fluctuation production number) of the first fluctuation production, the mode of "simulated continuous continuation production" of each time included in the "simulated continuous fluctuation production" And an aspect of “pseudo series end effect” included in the “pseudo series change effect”.
Here, the setting value may be suggested according to the mode of “pseudo series effect” (“pseudo series continuous effect” or “pseudo series end effect”).
Specifically, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a mode according to the setting value may be selected as the mode of “pseudo-series effect”.
That is, the normal mode and the special mode are defined as the modes of the "simulated series effect". In the "pseudo series effect" according to the normal mode, a pseudo run series symbol is usually displayed as the "pseudo series continuation symbol". On the other hand, in the "pseudo series effect" according to the special aspect, a special pseudo run series continuation symbol is displayed as the "pseudo series continuation symbol". Then, in consideration of the setting value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the mode of "simulated continuous effect" is determined.
For example, “pseudo reunion 4 fluctuation” is determined as the type of fluctuation mode (“fake reciprocation 4 fluctuation rendition” is determined as the aspect of the first fluctuation rendition), and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 When the setting value being set is “6” or “5”, one of the normal mode and the special mode is determined as the mode of “pseudo series effect”. At this time, one of the normal mode and the special mode is determined by lottery.
In addition, when "pseudo ream 2 fluctuation" or "pseudo ream 3 fluctuation" is determined as the type of fluctuation mode (as an aspect of the first fluctuation rendition "pseudo ream 2 fluctuation rendition" or "pseudo ream 3 fluctuation rendition" In the case where it is determined, the special mode is not determined as the mode of “pseudo series effect”. In addition, when the setting values stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 are “4” to “1”, the special mode is not determined as the mode of “pseudo series effect”. .
By this, it becomes possible to suggest a setting value by the aspect (the aspect of a false continuation continuation symbol) of a "simulated continuation effect".

In step S34-4, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the advance notice effect determination processing, the mode of the main advance notice effect and the sub-notice effect is determined.
As described above, in the present embodiment, as the main notice effect, a slashing notice is executed, and a character notice is executed as the sub notice effect.
In the advance presentation effect determination process, first, the production intensity (whether or not to execute the advance announcement) is determined.
In the present embodiment, “Slashing Striking Warning Intensity 0” to “Shipping Striking Warning Intensity 5” are defined as the production intensity of the tearing-down notice.
Then, if “辻 cutting notice strength 0” is determined as the production strength of the drop cutting notice, the cutting breaking notice is not executed. On the other hand, if "Sakai Saki notice intensity 1" to "Sakai Saki notice intensity 5" are determined as the production intensity of the Sakai cutting advance notice, the Sakai cutting notice is executed.
The degree of expectation of each production strength of the gossip notice is in the order of the highest expected degree, “goss play notice strength 5”, “the gossip notice strength 4”, “the gossip notice strength 3”, “the gossip notice strength 2”, “the gossip notice It is defined to be “strength 1” (high expectation → low expectation).
In the ROM of the production control circuit 300, a gossip notice production level lottery table in which the correspondence between the play strength lottery random numbers and the gossip notice strengths (“sloppy cut strength 0” to “boss cut notice strength 5”) is registered. It is stored.
In addition, a high probability hourly cutting edged notice effect intensity lottery table corresponding to the "special figure high probability state" and a high probability hourly cutting prior notice effect intensity lottery table corresponding to the "special figure low probability state" And are stored.
Furthermore, a high probability hourly slashing prior notice effect intensity corresponding to a combination of the type of fluctuation pattern, the type of stop symbol, and the set value ("1" to "6") as a high probability hourly slashing preliminary effect intensity lottery table. A lottery table is stored.
Also, as a low probability hourly breaking notice effect intensity lottery table, a low probability momentary falling notice effect intensity corresponding to the combination of the variation pattern type, the stop symbol type, and the set value (“1” to “6”) A lottery table is stored.
Then, the higher the probability that the high-level hourly breaking notice effect intensity lottery table corresponding to the upper setting value is selected, the higher the probability that “whole line breaking notice intensity 1” to “whole-head breaking notice intensity 5” is selected as the directy warning intensity. . In other words, the higher the probability value of the high-precedence slaying preliminary effect intensity lottery table corresponding to the upper setting value, the lower the probability that “the sloppy noticing intensity 0” is selected as the effect level of the insulting preliminary announcement.
As a result, during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state", the higher the setting value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the higher the probability that the breaking notice is executed. .
In order to determine the effect intensity of the advance notice, first, the effect intensity lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the current gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state"), the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) designated by the variation pattern designation command, and the symbol type designation command designate The type (stop symbol number) of the stop symbol and the set value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 are confirmed, and the cutting-away notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the acquired effect intensity lottery random number and the read-out advance notice effect intensity lottery table, the effect intensity of the advance notice of the action is determined (judged).

When one of the "striking warning intensity 1" to "singering alert intensity 5" is determined as the staging intensity of the slashing prior notice, the type of the slashing prior notice is determined.
In the present embodiment, when "Sakai Saki notice intensity 1" is determined as the Sasa Suri preliminary effect intensity, "Sakai Saki Seri notice 1" is determined as the Suga no Saki advance notice type.
On the other hand, when "Sakai Saki notice strength 2" is determined as the Sasa Sumi advance notice intensity, "Sakai Saki notice 2" is determined as a type of the Sakai Sake notice.
On the other hand, when "Sakai Saki notice strength 3" is determined as the Sasa Sumi advance notice intensity, "Sakai Saki notice 3" is determined as a type of the Syakai Saki notice.
On the other hand, when "Sakai Saki notice strength 4" is determined as the Sasa Suri advance notice strength, "Sakai Saki notice 4" is determined as a type of the Syakai Saki notice.
On the other hand, when "Sakai Saki notice strength 5" is determined as the Sasa Suri advance notice strength, "Sakai Saki notice 5" is determined as a type of the Syakai Saki notice.

In the advance presentation effect determination process, next, the effect intensity (whether or not to execute the sub-announcement) of the character announcement (sub-announcement presentation) is determined.
In the present embodiment, “character preview strength 0” to “character preview strength 5” are defined as the production level of the character preview.
Then, when "character preview intensity 0" is determined as the effect intensity of the character preview, the character preview is not executed. On the other hand, when "character preview intensity 1" to "character preview intensity 5" are determined as the effect intensity of the character preview, the character preview is executed.
The degree of expectation of each production intensity of the character announcement is, in descending order of expectation, “character announcement strength 5”, “character announcement strength 4”, “character announcement strength 3”, “character announcement strength 2”, “character announcement strength It is defined to be “strength 1” (high expectation → low expectation).
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, there is a character advance effect intensity lottery table in which the correspondence between the effect intensity lottery random number and the effect intensity of the character advance notice (“character notice intensity 0” to “character notice intensity 5”) is registered. It is stored.
In addition, a character advance effect intensity lottery table corresponding to the combination of the type of variation pattern, the type of stop pattern, and the set value (“1” to “6”) is stored as a character advance effect intensity lottery table. There is.
Then, the character preview effect strength lottery table corresponding to the upper setting value has a higher probability that “character notice strength 1” to “character notice strength 5” are selected as the effect strength of the character notice. In other words, the probability that "character preview intensity 0" is selected as the effect intensity of the character preview is lower as the character preview effect strength lottery table corresponding to the upper setting value is lower.
As a result, the higher the setting value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the higher the probability that the character advance notice will be executed.
Also, in the character advance notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the setting value “6” or “5”, “character notice strength 0” to “character notice strength 5” are registered as effect strengths of the character advance notice.
On the other hand, "character notice strength 0" to "character notice strength 4" are registered in the character notice effect intensity lottery table corresponding to the setting values "1" to "4" as the character notice effect strength ("character Notice strength 5 "is not registered).
This suggests that the setting value = "6" or "5" when a character announcement of a type corresponding to "character announcement strength 5"("character announcement 5" described later) is executed. .
In order to determine the effect intensity of the character advance notice, first, an effect intensity lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the type of fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command (variation pattern number), the type of stop symbol designated by the symbol type designation command (stop symbol number) The set value and the set value are checked, and the character advance effect intensity lottery table corresponding to the check result is read out. Then, based on the acquired effect intensity lottery random number and the read-out character advance effect intensity lottery table, the effect intensity of the character advance announcement is determined (judged).

If one of the "character preview intensity 1" to "character preview intensity 5" is determined as the effect intensity of the character preview, the type of the character preview is determined.
In the present embodiment, when "character preview intensity 1" is determined as the character preview effect intensity, "character preview 1" is determined as the type of character preview.
On the other hand, when "character preview intensity 2" is determined as the character preview effect intensity, "character preview 2" is determined as the type of character preview.
On the other hand, when "character preview intensity 3" is determined as the character preview effect intensity, "character preview 3" is determined as the type of character preview.
On the other hand, when "character preview intensity 4" is determined as the character preview effect intensity, "character preview 4" is determined as the type of character preview.
On the other hand, when "character preview intensity 5" is determined as the character preview effect intensity, "character preview 5" is determined as the type of character preview.

In step S34-5, the fluctuation effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the fluctuation effect setting process, an effect control table for fluctuation effect is set.
Specifically, in the change production setting process, an effect control table corresponding to the aspect (the change production number) of the first change effect determined in step S34-3, and the aspect of the second change effect determined in step S34-3 And an effect control table corresponding to (the change effect number).
Next, the effect control table read out is synthesized to generate an effect control table related to the variable effect. Then, the generated effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. By this, the change production is started.
In addition, when “pseudo series variation production” (“pseudo series 2 variation production”, “pseudo series 3 variation production” or “pseudo series 4 variation production”) is determined as the mode (the variation production number) of the first variation production Set the type determined in step S 34-3 as the type of “pseudo continuous continuation effect” of each time included in the “pseudo continuous fluctuation effect”, and is also included in the “pseudo continuous fluctuation effect” The type determined in step S34-3 is set as the type of "pseudo-series end effect".
In addition, in the step S34-4, if "the breaking notice strength 1" to "the breaking notice strength 5" are determined as the production intensity of the blowout notice (in the case where the breakout notice is executed), in step S34-4. The effect control table corresponding to the type of the determined advance notice is read out. Then, the effect control table read out is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the pre-cut warning is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the change production.
Furthermore, in step S34-4, if "character preview intensity 1" to "character preview intensity 5" are determined as the effect intensity of the character preview (if character preview is executed), in step S34-4. The effect control table corresponding to the determined type of character preview is read out. Then, the effect control table read out is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the character advance notice is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the change effect.

Next, the stop command reception process of step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, as shown in FIG. 43, the process proceeds to step S35-1.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that the stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2, and the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, the stop effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect setting process, the effect control table for the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the stop effect number determined in step S34-2 is read out. Then, the effect control table read out is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. By this, the stop effect is started.
Here, in the stop effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol that were temporarily displayed at the end of the change effect are displayed in a stopped state.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the "big hit" (winning) is determined by the special feature crash determination, the type of the big hit symbol is determined based on the value of the hit symbol random number included in the determination start information.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined according to the setting value.
That is, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), when the determination start information is the special view 1 start information and the set value = “1” to “3”, the value of the hit symbol random number = “0”. When it is "-""49","big hit 1 symbol" is determined, and when the hit symbol random number value is "50" to "99", "big hit symbol 2" is determined.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the determination start information is the special view 1 start information and the set value = “4” to “6”, the value of the hit symbol random number = “0”. When it is "-69", the "big hit 1 symbol" is determined, and when the hit symbol random number value = "70" to "99", the "big hit symbol 2" is determined.
As a result, when the first special symbol lottery is won when the setting value is "1" to "3", the selection probability of "big hit 1 symbol" is 50%, and "big hit 2 symbols" is selected. The probability is 50%.
On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is won when the setting value is “4” to “6”, the selection probability of “big hit 1 symbol” is 70%, and the selection probability of “big hit 2 symbol” = 30%.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "big hit 1 symbol" is selected, the "probable symbol" is selected as a stop symbol to be displayed in a stopped state in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. On the other hand, when the "big hit 2 symbol" is selected, the "normal symbol" is selected as the stop symbol to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4.
If you try to win the first special symbol lottery when the setting value = "1" to "3", then the appearance ratio (occurrence probability) of "ordinary symbol" will be 50%, and "probability variation" The appearance rate of the pattern is 50%.
On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is won when the setting value is “4” to “6”, the appearance rate of “normal pattern” is 30%, and the appearance rate of “probable pattern” = 70. It becomes%.
Therefore, in pachinko machine 1, it becomes possible to suggest a setting value by the appearance rate of each stop symbol ("normal symbol" or "probable variation symbol") at the time of winning the first special symbol lottery.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), when the determination start information is the special view 2 start information and the set value is “1” to “3”, the value of the hit symbol random number is “0”. If "big hit 3 symbols" is judged when it is from "24", and "big hit symbol 4" is judged when the value of the hit symbol random number = "25" to "49", the hit symbol random number is When the value = "50" to "74", "big hit 5 symbol" is determined, and when the hit symbol random number value = "75" to "99", "big hit 6 symbol" is determined .
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), when the determination start information is the special view 2 start information and the set value = “4” to “6”, the value of the hit symbol random number = “0”. "-""29","big hit 3 symbols" is determined, when the value of the hit symbol random number = "30"-"59", "big hit 4 symbols" is determined, hit symbol random number When the value = "60" to "89", "big hit 5 symbol" is determined, and when the hit symbol random number value = "90" to "99", "big hit 6 symbol" is determined .
As a result, when the second special symbol lottery is won when the setting value is "1" to "3", the selection probability of "big hit 3 symbols" is 25%, and "big hit 4 symbols" is selected The probability is 25%, and the selection probability of “5 big hit symbols” is 25%, and the selection probability of “6 big hit symbols” is 25%.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is won when the setting value is “4” to “6”, the selection probability of “big hit 3 symbols” is 30%, and the selection probability of “big hit 4 symbols” = 30%, the selection probability of "big hit 5 symbols" = 30%, and the selection probability of "big hit 6 symbols" = 10%.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to suggest the set value by the appearance rate of the big hit gaming state according to each kind at the time of winning the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, in pachinko machine 1, when the “big hit” (winning) is determined by the special figure crash judgment, the stop symbol (segment data) pertaining to the special symbol is based on the value of the hit symbol random number included in the judgment start information. It is judged.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the stop symbol (segment data) is determined regardless of the set value.
That is, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), when the first special symbol lottery is executed, one stop symbol is determined among “segment data A0” to “segment data A99”. At this time, if "Seg data A0" is selected if the hit symbol random number value is "0" and "Seg data A1" is selected if the hit symbol random number value is "1", the hit symbol random number is selected. In the case where the value of “2” is “Seg data A2”, “Seg data A 99” is selected when the value of the symbol random number = “99” per.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45C, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, one stop symbol is determined among “segment data B0” to “segment data B99”. At this time, if "Seg data B0" is selected when the hit symbol random number value is "0" and "Seg data B1" is selected if the hit symbol random number value is "1", the hit symbol random number is selected. When the value of “2” is “2”, “Seg data B2” is selected,..., And when the value of symbol random number = “99”, “Seg data B99” is selected.

By the above, in the pachinko machine 1, the correspondence between the big hit symbol type and the stop symbol (segment data) changes according to the set value. That is, the stop symbol (segment data) corresponding to each big hit symbol type changes according to the set value.
That is, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and (c), when the setting value is “1” to “3”, the stop symbols relating to “segment data A0” to “segment data A49” are “big hit 1 The stop symbols related to "segment data A50" to "segment data A99" are "big hit 2 symbols".
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44 (b) and (c), when the setting values are "4" to "6", the stop symbols related to "segment data A0" to "segment data A69" are "big hit 1". The stop symbols related to "segment data A70" to "segment data A99" are "big hit 2 symbols".
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (c), when the setting values are “1” to “3”, the stop symbols relating to “segment data B0” to “segment data B24” are “big hit 3”. The stop symbols for "segment data B25" to "segment data B49" are "big hit 4 symbols", and the stop symbols for "segment data B50" to "segment data B74" are "big hit 5 symbols", and "segment data The stop symbol concerning B75 "-" segment data B99 "turns into" big hit 6 symbol ".
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c), in the case of set values = "4" to "6", the stop symbols related to "segment data B0" to "segment data B29" are "big hit 3". The stop symbols for "segment data B30" to "segment data B59" are "big hit 4 symbols", and the stop symbols for "segment data B60" to "segment data B 89" are "big hit 5 symbols", and "segment data The stop symbols related to B90 "to" Seg data B99 "are" big hit 6 symbols ".

By this, the player can predict the setting value by a combination of the type of the big hit symbol and the stop symbol which is stopped and displayed on the special view display device (special view 1 display device or special view 2 display device). it can.
That is, for the stop symbols related to "segment data A50" to "segment data A69", when the set value = "1" to "3", when "big hit 2 symbols" is selected, the stop display is made If the value is “4” to “6”, stop display is performed when “big hit 1 symbol” is selected.
Therefore, as a result of the first special symbol lottery of the player, the stop symbol corresponding to the “normal symbol” is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4 (= “big hit 2 symbols” is selected) And, in the special figure 1 display device, when the stop design which relates to “segment data A50”-“segment data A 69” is stopped and displayed, it is predicted that setting value = “1”-“3”. it can.
On the other hand, as a result of the first special symbol lottery of the player, the stop symbol corresponding to the “probable change symbol” is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4 (= “big hit 1 symbol” is selected) And, in the special figure 1 display device, when the stop design which relates to “segment data A50”-“segment data A 69” is stopped and displayed, it is predicted that setting value = “4”-“6”. it can.

Similarly, for the stop symbols pertaining to "segment data B25" to "segment data B29", when the set value = "1" to "3", when the "big hit 4 symbol" is selected, the stop display is performed, In the case where the setting value is “4” to “6”, stop display is performed when “big hit 3 symbol” is selected.
Therefore, in the special figure 2 display device, the player performs stop display related to "Seg data B25" to "Seg data B29", and is executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state started according to the stop display. When the number of round games to be played is 15 [times] ("big hit 3 symbol" is selected), it can be predicted that the setting value = "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the special figure 2 display device, the player executes the stop symbol related to "Seg data B25" to "Seg data B29" in the stop display, and is executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state started according to the stop display. When the number of round games to be played is 10 [times] ("big hit 4 symbol" is selected), it can be predicted that the setting value = "1" to "3".

Similarly, for the stop symbols related to "segment data B50" to "segment data B59", when the set value = "1" to "3", when "big hit 5 symbols" is selected, the stop display is performed, In the case where the setting value is “4” to “6”, stop display is performed when “big hit 4 symbol” is selected.
Therefore, in the special figure 2 display device, the player executes the stop symbol related to "Seg data B50" to "Seg data B 59" in the stop display and during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state started according to the stop display. When the number of round games to be played is 10 [times] ("big hit 4 symbols" is selected), it can be predicted that the setting value = "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the special figure 2 display device, the player executes stop symbols related to “Seg data B50” to “Seg data B 59” in the stop display, and is executed during occurrence of the jackpot gaming state started according to the stop display. When the number of round games to be played is 5 [times] ("big hit 5 symbol" is selected), it can be predicted that the setting value = "1" to "3".

Similarly, for the stop symbols related to "segment data B75" to "segment data B89", when the set value = "1" to "3", when the "big hit 6 symbol" is selected, the stop display is performed, In the case where the setting value is “4” to “6”, when “big hit 5 symbol” is selected, stop display is performed.
Therefore, in the special figure 2 display device, after the stop symbols relating to "segment data B75" to "segment data B89" are stop-displayed, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state started according to the stop display, the player When the “special figure high probability state” is generated (“big hit 5 symbols” is selected), it can be predicted that the setting value is “4” to “6”.
On the other hand, in the special figure 2 display device, after the stop symbol relating to "segment data B75" to "segment data B89" is stopped and displayed, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state started according to the stop display, When the “special figure low probability state” is generated (“big hit 6 symbols” is selected), it can be predicted that the setting value is “1” to “3”.

(Function of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, according to the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area, the appearance rate of at least one of the plurality of stop symbols ("normal symbol" and "probable symbol") is Change.
By this, it is possible to suggest the value (set value) set in the setting information storage area by the appearance rate of the stop symbol ("normal symbol" or "probable symbol").
Therefore, the player's attention to the stop symbol can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 1)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, various modifications can be made in the above embodiments.
For example, in the above embodiment, a configuration in which a set value is suggested by a combination of a big hit symbol type and a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special view display device (special view 1 display device or special view 2 display device) It has become.
However, the setting value may be suggested by a combination of the type of the jackpot symbol and the effect image displayed on the display screen 31a.
For example, the setting value may be suggested by a combination of the type of the big hit symbol and the stop symbol relating to the effect symbols z1 and z2 displayed on the display screen 31a.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a big hit symbol lottery table and a stop effect data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a big hit symbol lottery table and a stop effect data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.
FIG. 46 (a) shows a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the case where the setting value is “1” to “3”. Further, FIG. 46 (b) shows a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the case where the setting value is “4” to “6”. Further, FIG. 46 (c) shows a winning time stop effect data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery.
Further, FIG. 47 (a) shows a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the case where the setting value is “1” to “3”. Further, FIG. 47 (b) shows a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the case where the setting value is “4” to “6”. Further, FIG. 47 (c) shows a winning time stop effect data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.

Specifically, the main control circuit 200 transmits information indicating the stop symbol (segment data / stop symbol number) related to the special symbol selected in step S11-5 to the effect control circuit 300 by the symbol type designation command. Do.
Further, in the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, a stop effect data table in which the correspondence between the stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) and the stop effect data (stop effect number) is registered is stored.
Also, as a stop effect data table, a winning stop effect data table corresponding to a case where a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won, and a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or first) 2) When the game is defeated in the special symbol lottery), a stop effect data table upon failure is stored.
Further, as the winning stop effect data table, a winning stop effect data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a winning stop effect data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), in the winning time stop effect data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, “segment data A0” to “segment data A49” (the value of the symbol random number = “0” to “ "Stop effect data A" is defined as the stop effect data corresponding to 49 "), and the stop effect corresponding to" Seg data A50 "to" Seg data A 69 "(per symbol random number value =" 50 "to" 69 ") "Stop effect data B" is defined as data, and "stop effect data C" as stop effect data corresponding to "Seg data A70" to "Seg data A 99" (per symbol random number = "70" to "99"). "Is defined.
Here, the stop effect based on the “stop effect data A”, the stop effect based on the “stop effect data B”, and the stop effect based on the “stop effect data C” are the effect images displayed on the display screen 31 a. The display modes (for example, the color and shape of the frame constituting the effect pattern z1 to be stopped and displayed) are different from each other.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), in the prize-on-off effect data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, "segment data B0" to "segment data B24" (the value of the symbol random number = "0" to ""Stop effect data a" is defined as the stop effect data corresponding to 24 "), and the stop effect corresponding to" Seg data B25 "to" Seg data B29 "(per symbol random number value =" 25 "to" 29 ") "Stop effect data b" is defined as data, and "stop effect data c" as stop effect data corresponding to "Seg data B30" to "Seg data B 49" (per symbol random number = "30" to "49") Is specified, and “stop effect data d” is specified as stop effect data corresponding to “Seg data B 50” to “Seg data B 59” (per symbol random number value “50” to “59”) "Stop effect data e" is defined as stop effect data corresponding to "segment data B60" to "segment data B74" (per symbol random number = "60" to "74"), and "segment data B75" to "segment data B75""Stop effect data f" is defined as stop effect data corresponding to segment data B 89 "(per symbol random number value =" 75 "to" 89 ")," segment data B 90 "to" segment data B 99 "(per symbol random number "Stop effect data g" is defined as the stop effect data corresponding to the value = "90" to "99".
Here, the stop effect based on the “stop effect data a”, the stop effect based on the “stop effect data b”, the stop effect based on the “stop effect data c”, and the stop effect based on the “stop effect data d” In the stop effect based on the “stop effect data e”, the stop effect based on the “stop effect data f”, and the stop effect based on the “stop effect data g”, the display mode of the effect image displayed on the display screen 31 a (For example, the color and pattern of the background constituting the effect pattern z1 to be stopped and displayed) are different from each other.

Then, in the effect control circuit 300, when the symbol type designation command is received, the stop effect data is selected as follows.
That is, the received symbol type designation command is the symbol type designation command corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, and the symbol type command designates the stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) corresponding to the "disappeared symbol". To do this, first, the winning selection stop presentation data table is read out. Then, the stop effect data corresponding to the stop symbol (segment data / stop symbol number) designated by the received symbol type designation command is selected from among the stop effect data registered in the read-out failure event effect data table.
On the other hand, the received symbol type designation command is a symbol type designation command corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, and the symbol type command designates a stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) corresponding to "big hit symbol". To do this, first, the winning-time stop effect data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is read out. Then, the stop effect data corresponding to the stop symbol (segment data / stop symbol number) designated by the received symbol type designation command is selected from the stop effect data registered in the read out winning time stop effect data table.
On the other hand, the symbol type designation command received is the symbol type designation command corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, and the symbol type command designates the stop symbol (segment data and stop symbol number) corresponding to the "big hit symbol" To do this, first, the winning-time stop effect data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is read out. Then, the stop effect data corresponding to the stop symbol (segment data / stop symbol number) designated by the received symbol type designation command is selected from the stop effect data registered in the read out winning time stop effect data table.
Then, based on the selected stop effect data (or the stop effect data corresponding to the selected stop effect number), the stop effect is executed.

By the above, as shown in FIG. 46, for the stop effect based on the “stop effect data B”, when the “big hit 2 symbols” is selected when the setting value = “1” to “3”. It is executed and when the set value = “4” to “6”, it is executed when “big hit 1 symbol” is selected.
Therefore, when "normal symbol" based on "stop effect data B" is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4 (when "big hit 2 symbol" is selected), the setting value = "1. "-" Is suggested.
On the other hand, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, when the "probable symbol" based on the "stop effect data B" is stopped and displayed (= when the "big hit 1 symbol" is selected), the setting value = "4 It is suggested that it is "-""6".

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 47, for the stop effect based on the “stop effect data b”, when the setting value = “1” to “3”, the “big hit 4 symbols” is selected and executed. In the case where the setting value is “4” to “6”, it is executed when “big hit 3 symbols” is selected.
Therefore, in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4, the effect pattern z1 based on the "stop effect data b" is stopped and displayed, and the round game executed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state started according to the stop display If the number of times is 15 [times] ("big hit 3 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting values = "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4, the effect pattern z1 based on the "stop effect data b" is stopped and displayed, and the round game executed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state started according to the stop display When the number of times is 10 [times] ("big hit 4 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting value = "1" to "3".

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 47, for the stop effect based on the “stop effect data d”, when the set value = “1” to “3”, “5 big hit symbols” is selected and executed. When the set value is “4” to “6”, it is executed when “big hit 4 symbols” is selected.
Therefore, in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4, the effect pattern z1 based on the "stop effect data d" is stopped and displayed, and the round game executed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state started according to the stop display If the number of times is 10 [times] ("big hit 4 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting values = "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4, the effect pattern z1 based on the "stop effect data d" is stopped and displayed, and the round game executed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state started according to the stop display If the number of times is 5 [times] ("big hit 5 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting value = "1" to "3".

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 47, for the stop effect based on the “stop effect data f”, when the set value = “1” to “3”, the “big hit 6 symbol” is selected and executed. When the set value is “4” to “6”, it is executed when “big hit 5 symbols” is selected.
Therefore, in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4, the effect pattern z1 based on the "stop effect data f" is stopped and displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state started according to the stop indication, the "special figure height" When the probability state is generated ("big hit 5 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting value is "4" to "6".
On the other hand, in the effect symbol display area a1 to a4, the effect pattern z1 based on the "stop effect data f" is stopped and displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state started according to the stop indication, "special figure low" When the probability state is generated ("big hit 6 symbols" is selected), it is suggested that the setting value is "1" to "3".

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above embodiment, the special figure critical judgment is performed based on the big hit value corresponding to the set value.
That is, during the setting value = “1” and the special figure low probability state, “0” to “204” of the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” is set as the big hit value.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2039” is set as the big hit value during the setting value = “1” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, during the setting value = “2” and the special figure low probability state, “0” to “209” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are set as big hit values.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2089” is set as the big hit value during the setting value = “2” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “214” is set as the big hit value during the setting value = “3” and the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2139” is regarded as a big hit value during the setting value = “3” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, during the setting value = “4” and the special figure low probability state, “0” to “219” of the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” is set as the big hit value.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2189” is set as a big hit value during the setting value = “4” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “224” is set as the big hit value during the setting value = “5” and the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2239” is set as the big hit value during the setting value = “5” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “229” is set as the big hit value during the setting value = “6” and the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2289” is taken as the big hit value during the setting value = “6” and the special figure high probability state.
However, regardless of the set value, it may be configured to execute the special figure crash determination based on the common big hit value. In such a configuration, the range of the jackpot random number to be used is made different according to the set value. That is, the ranges of the big hit values updated by the first and second loop counters are made different according to the set value.
For example, during the setting value = “1” and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65535” (the value of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “204” are set as big hit values.
On the other hand, while the setting value is “1” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65535” (the value of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2039” is set as a big hit value.
On the other hand, while the setting value = "2" and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is "0" to "65530" (the value of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65530”, “0” to “204” is set as a big hit value.
On the other hand, while the setting value = "2" and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is "0" to "65485" (the value of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65485”, “0” to “2039” is taken as a big hit value among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65485”.
On the other hand, during the setting value = "3" and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is "0" to "65525" (the value of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65525”, “0” to “204” are set as big hit values.
On the other hand, during the setting value = “3” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65435” (the value of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65435”, “0” to “2039” is set as a big hit value.
On the other hand, during the setting value = "4" and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is "0" to "65520" (the value of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65520”, “0” to “204” is set as a big hit value.
On the other hand, while the setting value = “4” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65385” (the values of the first and second loop counters (big hit random numbers) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65385”, “0” to “2039” is taken as a big hit value among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65385”.
On the other hand, while the setting value = "5" and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is "0" to "65515" (the values of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65515”, “0” to “204” are set as big hit values.
On the other hand, while the setting value is “5” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65335” (the values of the first and second loop counters (big hit random numbers) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65335”, “0” to “2039” is set as a big hit value.
On the other hand, while the setting value = "6" and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is "0" to "65510" (the value of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65510”, “0” to “204” is set as a big hit value.
On the other hand, while the set value = "6" and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is "0" to "65285" (the value of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) Among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65285”, “0” to “2039” is taken as a big hit value among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65285”.

1 Pachinko Machine 60 Main Display 61 Performance Display Unit 200 Main Control Circuit 210 CPU
220 ROM
230 RAM
300 production control circuit 400 payout control circuit

Claims (1)

Setting value selection means for selecting any one of a plurality of setting values according to the operation of the operation means;
The win determination means for executing a win determination to determine whether or not to cause a specific gaming state according to the set value selected by the set value selection means;
Display control means for executing display of any one of the plurality of stop symbols according to the result of the final drop determination;
A game machine characterized in that the appearance rate of at least one of the plurality of stop symbols changes in accordance with the set value selected by the set value selection means.

Images